®
2010 XTERRA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOREWORD
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive
models, a mark is placed at the begin-
ning of the applicable sections/items.
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
As with other vehicles with features for
off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident. Be sure to read
“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-
ing and driving” section of this manual.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicles with features of this type, fail-
ure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or an accident.
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
●
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-
road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-
ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving
safety precautions”, in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
performance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental
could
affect
its
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and with-
out obligation.
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from modi-
fications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon.
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
XM Radio requires
subscription, sold
separately after first
90 days. Not available
in Alaska, Hawaii or
Guam. For more
information, visit
www.xmradio.com.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
© 2010 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers
For Canadian customers
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
1
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Starting and driving
3
4
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
8
9
Index
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-14)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-44)
3. Front seat belts (P. 1-14)
4. Head restraints (P. 1-4)
5. Supplemental front-impact air
bags (P. 1-44)
6. Seats (P. 1-2)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P. 1-52)
8. Seat belts with pretensioners (P. 1-57)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-56)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-29)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Engine hood (P. 3-9)
2. Windshield wiper and washer
switch (P. 2-24)
3. Windshield (P. 8-19)
4. Power windows (P. 2-45)
5. Door locks, keyfob, keys
(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-13)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-32)
8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
9. Tire chains (P. 5-36)
10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
11. Headlight and turn signal
switch (P. 2-26)
12. Fog light switch (if so
equipped) (P. 2-28)
13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-11)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0058
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
1. Roof rack (P. 2-42)
2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
3. Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-25)
4. Rear window washer (P. 2-25)
5. Lift gate (P. 3-9)
6. Spare tire (P. 6-2)
7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-10)
9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0057
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Map lights (P. 2-48)
2. Sun visors (P. 3-12)
3. Inside mirror (P. 3-13)
4. Glove box (P. 2-36)
5. Console box (P. 2-36)
6. Front seats (P. 1-2)
7. Rear seats (P. 1-11)
8. Storage (P. 2-35)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0056
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
Vents (P. 4-2)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-26)
3.
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands-
Free Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-36, P. 4-38)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-44, P. 2-30)
Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-18)
Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)
8.
9.
Storage (P. 2-35)
Audio system controls (P. 4-17)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-36)
12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-53)
13. Auxiliary audio input jack
(if so equipped) (P. 4-34)
14. Power outlet (P. 2-33)
WIC1447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
15. Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-32)
Hill descent control switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-31)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-30)
16. Shift selector (P. 5-12)
17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-22)
18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-10)
19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-29)
20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)
21. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)
22. Off road lamps switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-29)
23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)
24. Power outside mirror controls
(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ40DE engine
1. Windshield washer fluid
reservoir (P. 8-13)
2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)
3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-22)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)
5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)
6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (MT model) (P. 8-12)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
8. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)
11. Battery (P. 8-13)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-13
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-14
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-17
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warn-
ing light
Door open warning
light
Automatic transmis-
sion position indica-
tor light (A/T models
only)
or
Engine oil pressure
warning light
2-14
2-15
Cruise main switch
indicator light
2-17
2-18
2-18
4WD warning light
Automatic transmis-
sion oil temperature
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-13
2-13
2-14
(
model)
Cruise set switch
indicator light
Low fuel warning
light
2-15
2-15
Electronic locking
rear differential (E-
Lock) system on
indicator light (if so
equipped)
Automatic transmis-
sion park warning
light (
Low tire pressure
warning light
model)
Low windshield-
washer fluid warning
light (if so equipped)
2-17
Brake warning light
4WD shift indicator
light (
2-18
2-18
or
model)
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-17
2-17
Front passenger air
bag status light
Charge warning
light
2-14
Supplemental air
bag warning light
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-18
2-31
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-20
High beam indicator
light (Blue)
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
Hill descent control
system on indicator
light (if so equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic
Control OFF indica-
tor light
2-20
Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL)
2-19
2-19
Overdrive off indica-
tor light (A/T models
only)
Security indicator
light
2-19
Slip indicator light
2-20
2-20
Transfer 4LO posi-
tion indicator light
(
model)
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Adjustable headrest (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Three-point type seat belt with retractor. . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Small children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
ARS1152
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0175
WRS0176
WRS0131
Forward and backward
Reclining
Seat lifter (if so equipped)
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the seat in position.
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of
the seat cushion to the desired position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position with the parking brake fully
applied.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
moved. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seat-
ing position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
WRS0389
LRS0900
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. All of the head
restraints are adjustable.
Lumbar support (if so equipped)
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with
risk of serious injury or death in
collision.
a
a head restraint.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0887
WRS0134
LRS0888
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
4. Stalks
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0889
LRS0890
LRS0891
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
Removal
Install
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints.
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
the adjustment notches
must be installed
᭺
2
in the hole with the lock knob
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating
position.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described in this section.
ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (if so
equipped)
WARNING
The adjustable headrests supplement the
other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against in-
jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust
the headrests properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the adjustable headrest stalks
or remove the adjustable headrests. Do
not use the seat if the adjustable head-
rests have been removed. If the headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust
the headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position. Failure to follow these
instructions can reduce the effectiveness
of the adjustable headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death in
a collision.
SPA1025
LRS0901
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the
headrests are adjustable.
Front-seat Active Head Restraints
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occu-
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Ⅲ Indicates the seating position is equipped with
an adjustable headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0887
WRS0134
LRS0888
To raise the headrest, pull it up.
Components
1. Adjustable headrest
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
Adjustment
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the
center of the seat occupant’s ears.
4. Stalks
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0889
LRS0890
LRS0891
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the headrest down.
Removal
Install
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable headrests.
1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in
the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing
the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-
1
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
justment notches
must be installed in the
᭺
2
hole with the lock knob
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
headrest down.
3. Remove the headrest from the seat.
4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose
in the vehicle.
3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-
cupant uses the seating position.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLEXIBLE SEATING
● If the head restraints are removed for
any reason, they should be securely
stored to prevent them from causing
injury to passengers or damage to the
vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seats when they are
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.
● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
LRS0608
Folding the front passenger’s seatback
(if so equipped)
● Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for
extra storage length when transporting long
items:
● Head restraints should be adjusted
properly as they may provide significant
protection against injury in an accident.
Always replace and adjust them prop-
erly if they have been removed for any
reason.
1
Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift
᭺
up on the recline lever, located on the out-
side edge of the seat, and fold the seatback
forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the
latch located on the upper corner of the
seatback to release the back of the seat.
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-
back flat forward to carry longer ob-
jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-
cured and not near an air bag. In a
crash, an inflating air bag might force
that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Se-
cure objects away from the area in
which an air bag would inflate. See
“Precautions on supplemental restraint
system” later in this section.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the front passenger’s seat
when it is in the fold-down position. Use
of these areas by passengers could re-
sult in serious injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
LRS0609
LRS0577
2
Once the seatback is released, it will enable
you to fold the front passenger seatback flat
over the seat cushion.
᭺
Folding the 2nd row bench seat
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum
cargo hauling:
3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a
seating position, lift up on the seatback and
push it up to an upright position. Then pull up
on the recline lever and lean the seatback to
a proper seating position. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Disconnect and secure the center seat belt
and tongues into the retractor base. See
“Stowing the center seat belt” later in this
section. Then properly stow the outboard
seat belts in the seat belt hooks before fold-
ing down the rear seats. See “Seat belt
hook” in this section for more information.
Lower the head restraints to the full “down”
position. Pull the strap forward, located in
the center of each seat cushion, and fold
each seat cushion toward the front of the
vehicle.
᭺
LRS0578
LRS0579
2
3
Then pull the straps located on the outside
edge of each seatback to fold the seatbacks
forward.
This provides a level cargo floor.
᭺
᭺
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Then lift up on the seat cushion to remove it
from the seat base. Be sure to store it in a
secure place.
To return the rear seatback to a seating position:
1. Push the anchor bars on the bottom of the
seat cushions down into the seat base.
2. Rotate the seat cushion toward the rear of
the vehicle and push down until they are
folded flat to secure each seat cushion to the
seat base. Make sure to hold the seat
belts above the seat cushion and prop-
erly push the seat cushion down into
place.
LRS0580
LRS0585
4
To return the bench seats to a seating posi-
tion, reverse this process. Raise the seat-
backs to an upright position. Make
sure to hold the seat belts above the
seat cushion, then push the seat cush-
ion down into place.
᭺
Removing the 2nd row bench seat
cushions
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
The rear seat cushion can be removed to provide
additional space when folding the 2nd row seat-
backs flat. To remove the 2nd row bench seat
cushions:
1. Pull the straps forward, located in the center
of each seat cushion, to fold the seat cush-
ions forward.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear
seat unless the seat bottom cushions
are in place and latched.
2. Lift up and fold each of the red release
handles on the seat base toward the front of
the vehicle. This will release the seat cushion
from the seat base.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured. If they are not com-
pletely secured in the latched position,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● If the seat cushions are removed for any
reason, they should be securely stored
to prevent them from causing injury to
passengers or damage to the vehicle in
case of sudden braking or an accident.
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0134
SSS0016
WARNING
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
● The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SSS0014
WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
● All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREGNANT WOMEN
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
WRS0174
Manual seat shown
Fastening the seat belts
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
1
Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
᭺
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section for more information.
LRS0594
LRS0595
2
3
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
᭺
᭺
on the hips as shown.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
sion. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
4
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
᭺
● The retractor is designed to lock dur-
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the re-
tractor.
●
●
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
●
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
1
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
᭺
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
●
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
●
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0240
SSS0241
Center of the rear bench seat
WARNING
1
The center seat belt has a connector tongue
᭺
● Always fasten the connector tongue
and the seat belt in the order shown.
2
and a seat belt tongue
. Both the connector
tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely
latched for proper seat belt operation.
᭺
● Always make sure both the connector
tongue and the seat belt tongue are
secured when using the seat belt or
installing a child restraint. Do not use
the seat belt or child restraint with only
the seat belt tongue attached. This
could result in serious personal injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop.
LRS0601
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stowing the center seat belt
● If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or sud-
den stop.
When folding down the rear seat, the rear center
seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position
as follows:
1
1. Hold the connector tongue
so that the
᭺
seat belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
buckle.
A
2. Insert a suitable tool such as a key
into
᭺
the connector buckle and release the con-
1
nector tongue
.
᭺
2
3. Fold the connector as illustrated
.
᭺
4. Then secure the connector tongue into the
3
retractor base
in the ceiling.
᭺
WARNING
● Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
● When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the seat-
backs are completely secured in the
latched position and the rear center
seat belt connector is completely
secured.
LRS0602
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching the center seat belt
WARNING
Always be sure the center seat belt connector
tongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-
connect only when folding down the rear seat.
● Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
● When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the seat-
backs are completely secured in the
latched position and the rear center
seat belt connector is completely
secured.
1
Pull out the seat belt tongue from the retrac-
tor base.
᭺
2
Pull out the connector tongue from the
molded retractor base.
᭺
3
Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver
buckle until it clicks.
᭺
● If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or sud-
den stop.
The center seat belt connector tongue and re-
ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark.
LRS0611
2nd row center seat belt comfort
guide
The center seat belt connector tongue can be
attached only into the rear center seat belt con-
nector buckle.
When using the 2nd row center seat belt it may
be necessary to use the comfort guide to adjust
the shoulder belt height for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper
seat belt fit.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat
belts” earlier in this section.
1. Raise the head restraint on the 2nd row
driver’s side seating position. Remove the
comfort guide from the stowed position by
pulling the cord from the channel.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0242
LRS0610
LRS0612
Front and 2nd row outboard seats
2. Insert the shoulder belt into the back of the
comfort guide so that the seat belt lays flat in
the guide. Be sure that the comfort guide
routes the seat belt properly over the center
of your shoulder and across your chest. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off of your shoulder.
3. To return the seat belt comfort guide to the
stowed position, route the comfort guide
strap in the channel under the 2nd row driv-
er’s side seating position head restraint and
attach the guide in the clip.
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
and 2nd row outboard seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
1
To adjust, pull out
move the shoulder belt anchor
the adjustment button and
᭺
2
to the desired
᭺
position, so the belt passes over the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be away from your face
and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-
lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder
belt anchor into position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.
LRS0583
Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding
down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on
the seat belt hooks.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
●
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is required.
●
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD SAFETY
●
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may come
too close to the face or neck. The lap belt
may not fit over their small hip bones. In an
accident, an improperly fitting seat belt
could cause serious or fatal injury. Always
use appropriate child restraints.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
tories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-
straints” later in this section.
●
●
●
Rear-facing child restraint
Forward-facing child restraint
Booster seat
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-
formation.
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFANTS
LARGER CHILDREN
WARNING
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-
men. The booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat
can only be used in seating positions that have a
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts” later
in this section.
ARS1098
WRS0256
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem” later in this section.
●
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
– Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated an-
chor point on the vehicle.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
●
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
●
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.
WRS0438
WRS0700
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0589
LRS0661
LRS0662
LATCH lower anchor point locations
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
LATCH lower anchor location
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top tether anchor
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
WARNING
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo
so it does not contact the top tether strap.
Cargo that is not properly secured or
cargo that contacts the top tether strap
may damage it during a collision. A child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH
system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
LRS0588
2nd row bench seat
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following loca-
tions:
●
2nd row bench on the floor behind the out-
board seating positions as shown.
●
2nd row bench center seatback as shown.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0801
WRS0802
LRS0673
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Rear-facing – step 3
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
LRS0674
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 4
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. See “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this
section.
WRS0256
WRS0761
● When installing a child restraint system
in the rear center position, both the
center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle tongue must be secured. See
“Attaching the rear center seat belt” in
this section.
Rear-facing – step 1
Rear-facing – step 2
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0669
LRS0670
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 3
Rear-facing – step 4
Rear-facing – step 5
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
WRS0763
WRS0799
Rear-facing – step 6
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the
LATCH system:
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0800
LRS0671
WRS0697
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Forward-facing – step 4
Forward-facing – step 5
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest
when the child restraint is removed.
See “Adjustable headrest” in this section for
head restraint adjustment information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable headrest and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-
ing position or a different child restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 5.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint or headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest
is removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure to reinstall the head restraint or
headrest when the child restraint is
removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-
able headrest” in this section for head re-
straint or headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
WRS0699
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it
is interfering with the proper child restraint
fit, try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, there-
fore, must not be used in the front seat.
When installing a child restraint system in
the rear center position, both the center
seat belt connector tongue and buckle
tongue must be secured. See “Attaching
the rear center seat belt” in this section.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0680
LRS0667
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 3
Forward-facing – step 4
Forward-facing – step 5
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 7.
WRS0681
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 7
Forward-facing – step 6
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
WRS0475
LRS0588
Forward-facing — step 10
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
status light
should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated see, ЉFront passenger
air bag and status lightЉ in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
1. Position the top tether strap over the top of
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
1
the head restraint
with the head restraint
᭺
in the full “down” position.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
2
point
on the seat directly behind the child
᭺
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.
restraint.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0455
LRS0453
LRS0464
●
Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
●
Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
low back booster seat
is chosen, the
᭺
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
high back booster seat
should be used.
●
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
᭺
●
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
LRS0454
WRS0699
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If
the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints”in this sec-
tion for head restraint adjustment, removal
and installation information.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster seat.
PRECAUTIONS ON
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
●
Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
●
●
●
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
WRS0475
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bag
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
status light
may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side impact
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side impact or rollover
collisions. In a side impact, the curtain and roll-
over air bags are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both
curtain and rollover air bags are designed to
inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be correctly
worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-
tance away from the steering wheel, instrument
panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier
in this section for instructions and precautions on
seat belt usage.
WRS0031
● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
After placing the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
ARS1133
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1041
ARS1042
ARS1043
WARNING
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain and rollover air bags
inflate if they are not properly re-
strained. Pre-teens and children should
be properly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1044
ARS1045
WRS0256
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for
details.
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0431
WRS0365
SSS0162
Do not lean against the door.
Do not lean against doors or windows.
Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:
● The side air bags and curtain and roll-
over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in
the event of a frontal impact, rear im-
pact, or lower severity side collision.
Always wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain and rollover air bags are most
effective when you are sitting well back
and upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.
WRS0363
SSS0159
WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
4. Crash zone sensor
5. Occupant classification system control
unit
6. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor)
7. Satellite sensors
8. Seat belt buckle switches
9. Seat belt with pretensioner
10. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
WRS0871
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it
additionally monitors the weight of an occupant
or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based
on information from the sensors, only one front air
bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the
crash severity and whether the front occupants
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front
passenger air bag may be automatically turned
OFF under some conditions, depending on the
weight detected on the passenger seat and how
the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag
is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be
illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will
not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section for further details. One front air bag
inflating does not indicate improper performance
of the system.
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
flate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper front air bag system opera-
tion.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tion.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-
sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-
ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status light
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
to meet the requirements.
The front passenger air bag status light
located near the climate controls. The light oper-
is
One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
described later. For example, if a child is in the
front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag
OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
child restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-
tion can vary depending on the front passenger
seat belt sensors.
ates as follows:
●
●
Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
is
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
illuminates to indicate
WRS0475
●
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-
Front passenger air bag and status light
tion: The light
the front passenger air bag is operational.
is OFF to indicate that
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some con-
ditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
ure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). Based on the
weight on the seat detected by the occupant
classification sensor and the belt tension de-
tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag
System determines whether the front passenger
air bag should be automatically turned OFF as
required by the regulations.
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode,
this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat
belt properly for the most effective protection by
the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
minate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
light
, located in the meters and gauges
area of the the instrument panel, will blink. Have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
● Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unautho-
rized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the air bag system.
WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor (pattern sensor).
● A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
collisions, although they may inflate if the forces
in another type of collision are similar to those of
a higher severity side impact. They are designed
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted. They may not inflate in certain side colli-
sions.
or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra-
sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain
and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to
the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the
occupants. Because of this, the force of the side
air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to
inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements
(for example, during severe off roading) may
cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bag operation.
LRS0592
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact and
When the side air bags and curtain and rollover
supplemental air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in-
flated for a short time.
rollover supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-
over air bags are located in the side roof rails.
These systems are designed to meet voluntary
guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to
out-of-position occupants. However, all of the
information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags
are designed to inflate in higher severity side
The side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags
help to cushion the impact force to the head of
occupants in the front and rear outboard seating
positions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat belts with pretensioners (Front
seats)
● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
WARNING
● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
ter activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
● Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag systems
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
Installation of electrical equipment
should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the side air bag or cur-
tain and rollover air bag systems.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag system
components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pre-
tensioner system checked and, if nec-
essary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain and rollover
air bag systems. This is to prevent dam-
age to or accidental inflation of the side
air bag and curtain and rollover air bag
systems.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are
yellow or orange for easy identification.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
curtain and rollover air bag systems.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
● Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-
tem, the supplemental air bag warning
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
light
will not come on, will flash intermit-
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition switch has been placed in the
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-
sioner system may not function properly. They
must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle
to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction
with the front air bag system. The pretensioner
system also activates with the curtain and rollover
air bags in certain types of rollover collisions or
near rollovers. Working with the seat belt retrac-
tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions,
helping to restrain front seat occupants.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
WRS0885
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels
The warning labels are located on the sur-
face of the sun visor.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
Repair and replacement procedure
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed
to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag
warning light remains illuminated after inflation
has occurred. Repair and replacement of these
supplemental air bag systems should be done
only by a NISSAN dealer.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner
systems may not operate properly. They must be
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt
pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits in-
clude the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone
sensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, occu-
pant classification sensor, front air bag modules,
side air bag modules, curtain and rollover air bag
modules, pretensioners and all related wiring.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts
should be pointed out to the person performing
the maintenance. The ignition switch should al-
ways be in the LOCK position when working
under the hood or inside the vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain and rollover air bag has inflated,
the air bag module will not function
again and must be replaced. Addition-
ally, if any of the front air bags inflate,
the activated pretensioners must also
be replaced. The air bag module and
pretensioner should be replaced by a
NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and
pretensioner cannot be repaired.
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
and rollover air bag systems and the
pretensioner system should be in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-
tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-
rect disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . .2-12
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . .2-27
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Off road lamps switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . .2-30
Hill descent control switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . .2-31
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Seat pockets (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Cargo area storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Roof rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
Vents (P. 4-2)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-26)
3.
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா Hands-
Free Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-36, P. 4-38)
4.
5.
6.
7.
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-44, P. 2-30)
Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-18)
Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)
8.
9.
Storage (P. 2-35)
Audio system controls (P. 4-17)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-44)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-36)
12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-53)
13. Auxiliary audio input jack
(if so equipped) (P. 4-34)
14. Power outlet (P. 2-33)
WIC1447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2 Instruments and controls
METERS AND GAUGES
15. Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-32)
Hill descent control switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-31)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-30)
16. Shift selector (P. 5-12)
17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-22)
18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-10)
19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-29)
20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)
21. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)
22. Off road lamps switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-29)
23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)
24. Power outside mirror controls
(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WIC0911
1. Warning/indicator lights
2. Tachometer
6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip com-
puter (if so equipped)
3. Speedometer
4. Fuel gauge
7. Engine oil pressure gauge
8. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Voltmeter
Instruments and controls 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
LIC0780
WIC0912
With twin trip odometer
Changing the display:
1. Speedometer
2. Odometer
3. Change button
For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer,
pushing the change button changes the display
as follows:
Trip
→ Trip
→ Trip
2-4 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
display will change to (----).
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
The display of the trip computer is situated in the
speedometer display. When the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, the display scrolls all
the modes of the trip computer and then shows
the mode chosen before the ignition switch was
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
●
If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be dis-
played.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
selected by pushing the trip computer change
button. The following modes can be selected:
●
When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)
Average speed (MPH or km/h)
WIC0922
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-
ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the
fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done
by pressing the change button for more than
approximately 1 second. The display is updated
every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a
reset, the display shows (----).
With trip computer
For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push-
ing the change button changes the display as
follows:
Trip
→ Trip
→ Distance to Empty →
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
Average speed → Average fuel consumption →
The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is
automatically selected and the digits blink in or-
der to draw the driver’s attention. Press the
change button if you wish to return to the mode
that was selected before the warning occurred.
The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the
vehicle is refueled.
Journey time → Trip
For additional information, refer to “Trip com-
puter” later in this section.
Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-
ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer
to zero.
Instruments and controls 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Average fuel consumption (Mpg or
l/100km)
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Resetting is done by pressing the change button
for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-
play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the
first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).
Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time since the
last reset. The displayed time can be reset by
pressing the change button for more than ap-
proximately 1 second.
LIC0738
LIC0739
TACHOMETER
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
Trip computer reset
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine
Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-
onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-
tance to empty (dte).
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
1
into the red zone
.
᭺
1
normal range
when the gauge needle points
᭺
CAUTION
within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
2-6 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency”section for immediate
action required.
CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
the
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
Malfunction Indicator Light
a
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
LIC0740
● For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).
Instruments and controls 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)
● If the gauge needle does not move with
the proper amount of engine oil, have
the vehicle checked by
a
NISSAN
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in
such a condition could cause serious
damage to the engine.
LIC0741
WIC1299
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
VOLTMETER
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-
tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The
needle should be in the middle of the gauge when
the engine is running.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt-
age. When the engine is running, it indicates the
generator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal
1
range (11 – 15 volts)
while the engine is
᭺
running, it may indicate that the charging system
is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
2-8 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
dicates heading direction of vehicle.
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the
button as described in the fallowing
chart to activate various features of the automatic
anti-glare rearview mirror.
Push and hold
Feature:
the
(Push button again for about 1 sec-
ond to change settings)
button for about:
1 second
Compass display toggles on/off
Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
toggles on/off
8 seconds
WIC0904
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
11 seconds
13 seconds
COMPASS DISPLAY
Compass enters calibration mode
Push the
button for about 1 second when
For more information about the automatic anti-
glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rear-
view mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-
justments” section.
the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the
outside temperature and compass direction dis-
1
play
on or off. The display will indicate the
᭺
direction of the vehicle’s heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the “CAL” or “C” icon is illuminated in the
compass display, calibrate the compass by driv-
ing the vehicle in three complete circles at less
than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
Instruments and controls 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the
button for about
11 seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the
button repeatedly to toggle
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the
button for about 13 seconds. The
“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-
minate.
WIC0355
2-10 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.
CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light
(if so equipped)
Hill descent control system on indicator light
(if so equipped)
or
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Automatic transmission oil temperature warning
light (if so equipped)
Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Overdrive off indicator light (A/T models only)
Security indicator light
Automatic transmission park warning light
(
model)
Automatic transmission position indicator light
(A/T models only)
or
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Cruise main switch indicator light
Cruise set switch indicator light
Slip indicator light
Door open warning light
Transfer 4LO position indicator light
(
model)
Engine oil pressure warning light
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system on indicator light (if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
4WD warning light (
model)
4WD shift indicator light (
model)
Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indicator light
Low fuel warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
High beam indicator light (Blue)
Low tire pressure warning light
2-12 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
CHECKING BULBS
Automatic transmission park
warning light ( model)
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
WARNING
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion.
● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that
the automatic transmission P (Park) po-
sition will not function and the transfer
case is in neutral.
,
or
,
,
,
,
The following lights come on briefly and then go
off:
Automatic transmission oil
temperature warning light (if so
equipped)
● When parking, always make sure that
the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates
and the parking brake is set. Failure to
engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H
or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov-
ing unexpectedly, resulting in serious
personal injury or property damage.
or
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
This light comes on when the automatic transmis-
sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comes
on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as
soon as safely possible until the light turns off.
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
an open circuit in the electrical system.
Have the system repaired promptly.
● Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H
or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP
warning light when the shift selector is
in the P position and the ATP warning
light is ON. (Before shifting the 4WD
switch into the 4LO position, move the
shift selector into the N position once,
shift the shift selector into P again and
make sure the ATP warning light is
OFF.)
WARNING LIGHTS
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation when the A/T
oil temperature warning light is on may
damage the automatic transmission.
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
indicates the ABS is operational.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light indicates that the automatic transmis-
sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-
fer control is not secured in any drive position
while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,
the transmission will disengage and the drive
wheels will not lock.
WARNING
CAUTION
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely. Refer to “Variable
voltage control system” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section later
in this manual.
or
Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Parking brake indicator
Door open warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
● If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
This light comes on when any of the doors are not
closed securely while the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle and perform the following:
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Charge warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
CAUTION
Low fuel warning light
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
during operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle
reaches E (Empty).
CAUTION
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD
warning light turns on when you are
driving on dry hard surface roads:
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Low tire pressure warning light
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
– in the 4LO position for automatic
transmission models, stop the ve-
hicle and shift the shift selector to
the N position with the brake pedal
depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
4WD warning light
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
(
model)
The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after
the engine is started.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
– in the 4LO position for manual trans-
mission models, stop the vehicle and
shift the shift selector to the N posi-
tion with the clutch pedal depressed
and shift the 4WD shift switch to
2WD,
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,
the warning light will either remain illuminated or
blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting
and driving” section.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Instruments and controls 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automati-
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
WARNING
● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, have the vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”
section.
CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped)
Supplemental air bag warning
light
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bags, curtain and rollover air bags
and/or pretensioners will not operate in
an accident. To help avoid injury to your-
self or others, have your vehicle checked
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
This light comes on when the windshield-washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid
as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and pretensioners need servicing and your ve-
hicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
Seat belt warning light and
chime
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic transmission
position indicator light
(A/T models only)
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
this indicator light shows the shift selector posi-
tion. See “Driving the vehicle”in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint systems (air bag system) and/or the
pretensioners may not function properly. For ad-
ditional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
Cruise main switch indicator
light
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise set switch indicator
light
4WD shift indicator light
model)
High beam indicator light
(blue)
(
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The light should turn off within 1 second after
placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-
cator light will illuminate the position selected by
the 4WD shift switch.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
while shifting from one drive mode to the
other.
Hill descent control system on
indicator light (if so equipped)
Electronic locking rear
differential (E-Lock) system on
indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on briefly and then turns
off.
Front passenger air bag status
light
This light comes on when the electronic locking
rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully
engaged.
The light comes on when the hill descent control
system is activated.
The front passenger air bag status light (
)
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used.
The indicator light flashes when the system is first
turned on. When the system fully engages, the
light remains on. If the switch is on and the
indicator light continues to flash, the system is
not engaged.
If the hill descent control switch is on and the
indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
If the indicator light does not come on or blink
when the hill descent switch is on, the system
may not be functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
For additional information, see “Electronic lock-
ing rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” later
in this section and “Electronic locking rear differ-
ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
For additional information, see “Hill descent con-
trol switch” later in this section and “Hill descent
control system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
●
Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive the
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
vehicle. The
a few driving trips. If the
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
the dealer.
light should turn off after
light does not
Overdrive off indicator light
(A/T models only)
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
●
Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
This light comes on when the overdrive function
is OFF.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
The automatic transmission overdrive function is
controlled by the overdrive switch.
See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
Security indicator light
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For additional information, see “Security sys-
tems” later in this section.
shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other
gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the
vehicle may move unexpectedly.
Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF
indicator light
Slip indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the
transfer case is in the 4LO position (
model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control
system is not functioning properly. This indicates
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper-
ating.
When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow the
instructions below:
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or
the traction control system is operating, thus
alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction
limits. The road surface may be slippery.
●
For automatic transmission models, stop the
vehicle and shift the shift selector to the N
(Neutral) position with the brake pedal de-
pressed, then depress and turn the 4WD
shift switch to 4LO or 4H.
Transfer 4LO position indicator
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
again or restart the engine and the system will
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
light (
model)
●
For manual transmission models, stop the
vehicle and shift the shift selector to the N
(Neutral) position with the clutch pedal de-
pressed, then depress and turn the 4WD
shift switch to 4LO or 4H.
The light should turn off within 1 second after
turning the ignition switch to ON.
This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is
set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you turn the ignition key to the ON position.
The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light stays on or
comes on along with the SLIP indicator light
while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic
Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch
between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle
and shift the shift selector to the N position with
the brake pedal (AT models) or clutch pedal (MT
models) depressed.
The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the
switch while driving.
Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator
light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch
to 4LO.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
If the battery is removed or discharged, the Ve-
hicle Dynamic Control system is disabled and the
VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. To reset the system, you must perform
the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
The indicator light may blink while shifting
from one drive mode to the other.
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and
remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the
transmission into gear. If the shift selector is
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.
If the light does not go off after performing the
reset procedure, have the traction control system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC
light will illuminate when the electronic locking
rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if so
equipped) is turned on and the E-lock system is
engaged. If the E-lock system disengages or the
switch is turned off, the VDC system will be
enabled and the VDC light will turn off.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
LIC0372
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems:
●
●
Vehicle security system
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
Instruments and controls 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Keyfob operation:
●
If the key is turned slowly when locking
the driver’s door, the system may not
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key, the
system may be disarmed when the key
is removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door
once and lock it again.
● Push the
button on the keyfob.
All doors lock. The hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once to indicate
all doors are locked.
● When the
button is pushed with
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
minder that the doors are already locked.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
●
Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
arm with all doors closed and locked
with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position.
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to
“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion later in this manual.
Vehicle security system activation
How to arm the vehicle security
system
4. Confirm that the
on. The
indicator light comes
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
light stays on for about 30
seconds. The vehicle security system is now
pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-
hicle security system automatically shifts
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
●
The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
into the armed phase. The
light begins
●
The alarm automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door with the key or by pressing
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s
door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or
the ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON
position, the system will not arm.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with the key, power door lock
switch (if the door is opened, locked and
then closed), or with the keyfob.
the
button on the keyfob.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The alarm is activated by:
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
●
opening a door without using the key or
keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using
the inside lock knob or the power door lock
switch).
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the liftgate with the key or by pressing
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
the
button on the keyfob.
The alarm does not stop if the ignition
switch is turned to ACC or ON.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
LIC0474
Security indicator light
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System is operational.
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for
example, when interference is caused by another
registered key, an automated toll road device or
automatic payment device on the key ring), restart
the engine using the following procedures:
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately 10
seconds.
Instruments and controls 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
4
Push the lever up
to have one sweep opera-
᭺
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-
trate and water.
tion (MIST) of the wiper.
5
Pull the lever toward you
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
to operate the
᭺
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
WIC0843
● Do not operate the washer continu-
SWITCH OPERATION
ously for more than 30 seconds.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reser-
voir tank.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
᭺
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
A
B
(Slower) or
(Faster).
᭺
᭺
2
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
᭺
3
High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-
tion
᭺
2-24 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the window and ob-
scure your vision. Warm the rear window
with the defroster before you wash the
rear window.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
LIC0783
WIC0844
● Do not fill the windshield-washer reser-
voir tank with windshield-washer fluid
concentrates at full strength.
Type A
The rear window wiper and washer operate when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light comes on.
Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
reservoir tank. Do not use the
windshield-washer reservoir tank to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
to operate the wiper.
1
Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
᭺
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
2
ON – continuous low speed operation
᭺
3
Push the switch forward
to operate the
CAUTION
᭺
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
Instruments and controls 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
LIC1419
LIC0706
LIC0688
Type B
Type A
Type B
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
1
When turning the switch to the
posi-
᭺
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
2
When turning the switch to the
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
posi-
᭺
2-26 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the headlights automatically turn off with the
headlight switch in the or position,
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if
the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
and then turned to the
or
position.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
WIC0859
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
Headlight beam select
1
To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
᭺
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
and the
light illuminates.
2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
᭺
OFF position or in the
headlight switch to the
position. Turn the
position for full
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
᭺
illumination when driving at night.
Battery saver system
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or
position, the headlights will turn off after
5 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC0917
WIC0860
WIC0861
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
to the
switch to the
position, then turn the fog light
position.
The instrument brightness control operates when
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
᭺
the headlight control switch is in the
or position.
Turn the control
,
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
A
to adjust the brightness of
᭺
Lane change signal
instrument panel lights when driving at night.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
᭺
2-28 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
To turn the off road lights off, press the off road
lamps switch again. If the high beam function of
the headlights is turned off at any time, the off
road lights will turn off as well. If the high beam
function is turned back on, the off road lamps
switch needs to be pressed again with the covers
still removed in order to turn on the off road lights.
The covers should remain on the off road lights
when the lights are not in use.
LIC1448
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
OFF ROAD LAMPS SWITCH (if so
equipped)
The off road lights are designed to increase vis-
ibility when driving during off road conditions. To
turn on the off road lights:
WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
●
●
●
The covers must be removed from the off
road lights.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
The headlights must be set to the high beam
function.
Press the off road lamps switch.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HORN
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
WIC1449
WIC0534
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions.
To sound the horn, push the area between the
horn icons on the steering wheel.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and
driving” section.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
●
●
the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position
and the vehicle speed must be under 21
mph (35 km/h), and
● The hill descent control may not control
the vehicle speed on a hill under all load
or road conditions. Always be prepared
to depress the brake pedal to control
vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-
sult in a collision or serious personal
injury.
the hill descent control system switch must
be ON.
The hill descent control system on indicator light
will come on when the system is activated. Also,
the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent
control system applies the brakes to control ve-
hicle speed.
CAUTION
When the hill descent control system op-
erates continuously for a long time, the
temperature of the brake pads may in-
crease and the hill descent control system
may be temporarily disabled (the indicator
light will blink). If the indicator light does
not come on continuously after blinking,
stop using the system.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
while the hill descent control system is on, the
system will stop operating temporarily. As soon
as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the
hill descent control system begins to function
again if the hill descent control operating condi-
tions are fulfilled.
LIC0743
WARNING
● Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle speed
when driving on steep downhill grades.
Always drive carefully when using the
hill descent control system and decel-
erate the vehicle speed by depressing
the brake pedal if necessary. Be espe-
cially careful when driving on frozen,
muddy or extremely steep downhill
roads. Failure to control vehicle speed
may result in a loss of control of the
vehicle and possible serious injury or
death.
The hill descent control system is designed to
reduce driver workload when going down steep
hills. The hill descent control system helps to
control vehicle speed so the driver can concen-
trate on steering the vehicle.
The hill descent control system on indicator light
blinks if the switch is on and all conditions for
system activation are not met or if the system
becomes disengaged for any reason.
To turn off the hill descent control system, push
the switch to the OFF position.
To activate the hill descent control system:
For additional information, see “Hill descent con-
trol system on indicator light” earlier in this sec-
tion and “Hill descent control system” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
●
the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position
and the vehicle speed must be under 15
mph (25 km/h) or
Instruments and controls 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM
SWITCH (if so equipped)
are not met or the system becomes disengaged,
the indicator light will continue to flash.
● Use the E-Lock system only when free-
ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position
before using the E-Lock system. Never
use the E-Lock system on a slippery
road surface such as snow or ice sur-
face. Using the E-Lock system when
driving in these road conditions may
cause unexpected movement of the ve-
hicle during engine braking, accelerat-
ing or turning, which may result in an
accident and serious personal injury.
The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled
and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock
system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light
illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.
See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system” in the “Starting and Driving” section for
further explanation and system limitations.
CAUTION
WARNING
● After using the E-Lock system, turn the
switch OFF to prevent possible damage
to driveline components from extended
use.
● Never leave the E-Lock system ON
when driving on paved or hard-surfaced
roads. Turning the vehicle may result in
the rear wheels slipping and result in an
accident and personal injury. After us-
ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-
hicle, turn the system OFF.
LIC0729
The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock)
system can help provide added traction if the
vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck.
● Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h)
when the system is engaged. Doing so
could result in possible damage to the
driveline.
To activate the E-Lock system:
●
●
●
the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position
(4-wheel drive vehicles),
● Do not turn on the E-lock system while
the tires are spinning. Doing so could
damage drivetrain components.
the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4
mph (7 km/h) or less, and
the E-Lock system switch must be turned
ON.
When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indi-
cator light will flash until the system engages.
However, if all operation conditions listed above
2-32 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start)
SWITCH (if so equipped)
POWER OUTLET
To use the clutch interlock switch:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal with your right foot.
3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal and
release the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
5. Press and release the clutch interlock
switch. The CANCEL light on the switch will
illuminate.
6. Turn the ignition to the START position to
start the engine and, at the same time, de-
press the accelerator pedal with your right
foot. As the vehicle begins to move, take
your left foot off the brake. Once the engine
has started, the clutch interlock switch
CANCEL light shuts off. Do not use the
interlock switch to start the engine under
normal driving conditions.
WIC1420
WIC0817
Front row
WARNING
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones.
Pay special attention to your surround-
ings when using the clutch interlock
switch. The vehicle will move forward or
backward according to the gear selected.
The power outlet located on the instrument panel
and the power outlet located in the cargo area are
powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.
The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch allows
for starting the engine without depressing the
clutch pedal. This feature helps you restart the
engine if it stops under difficult conditions. (For
example, the engine stops on a steep hill and a
slight movement forward or backward might be
dangerous.)
Open the cap to use a power outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
LIC0761
LIC0862
Center console
CAUTION
Luggage area
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
2-34 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORAGE
LIC1539
LIC0818
WIC1421
AT model (if so equipped)
MT model (if so equipped)
Top center tray
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sud-
den stop.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0766
LIC0768
WIC0609
CONSOLE BOX
GLOVE BOX
SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so
equipped)
1
Pull up on the lever
᭺
to open the console box lid
To open the top portion of the glove box, push the
2
.
A
latch
up and raise the lid.
᭺
᭺
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull
WARNING
B
the handle
down and lower the lid.
᭺
● Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove
box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or
unlock the glove box.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC0863
LIC0575
MAP POCKETS
SEAT POCKETS (if so equipped)
A pocket is located on the back of the driver’s
seat.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC0827
WIC0771
LIC0864
Front
2nd row (rear of front console)
Bottle holder
CAUTION
To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front
console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid. If
stepped on, the cup holder is designed to snap
loose from the console. To re-install, close the
cup holder assembly and push it back into the
console opening.
CUP HOLDERS
The front cup holders have adapters that can be
removed to accommodate larger cups.
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
To fold the 2nd row bench seat back, first close
the cup holder.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
●
Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.
WIC1519
CARGO AREA STORAGE
LUGGAGE HOOKS
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
1
To access the floor storage area, push down
to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle
to lift the luggage board.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo
with ropes or other types of straps.
᭺
2
᭺
WARNING
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
Do not drive with the luggage board teth-
ered to a ceiling hook. In a sudden stop or
collision, the luggage board could come
loose and cause personal injury.
● Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LTI0140
LTI0141
Side finisher
Floor hooks
Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)
to a single hook.
Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)
to a single hook.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0876
LIC0866
Cargo net (if so equipped)
Right-hand luggage side net
The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.
The right-hand luggage side net is not removable.
CARGO NETS
WARNING
WARNING
To install the large cargo net (if so equipped),
attach the hooks to the retainers.
● The cargo restrained in the luggage
side nets must not exceed 8.5 lb (3.9 kg)
for each net or the net may not stay
secured.
● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
To remove the large cargo net, detach the hooks
from the cargo net retainers.
● Do not place sharp objects in the lug-
gage side nets. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and cause
injury when the vehicle is moving or if
the vehicle is involved in a collision.
● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.
Instruments and controls 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0867
Left-hand luggage side nets
To install the removable left-hand luggage side
A
net , attach the net to the retainers. To remove,
᭺
detach the net from the retainers.
The smaller left-hand luggage side net is not
removable.
WIC0868
ROOF RACK
2-42 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always evenly distribute the cargo on the roof
rack. The maximum total load including the
gear basket is 150 lb (68 kg) evenly distrib-
uted. The maximum total load for the gear
basket is 30 lb (13 kg) evenly distributed. Be
careful that your vehicle does not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s side door
jamb pillar). For more information regarding
GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading
information” in the “Technical and consumer in-
formation” section later in this manual.
4. Secure the cargo with rope.
WARNING
5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar
adjusting screws.
● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
roof rack.
To remove:
1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the
1
Torxdriver
᭺
by turning counterclockwise
᭺
● Heavy loading of the roof rack has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or abnor-
mal handling maneuvers.
A
.
C
2. Rotate the clamps
.
᭺
3. Remove the crossbar.
4. Reverse to install.
● Roof rack load should be evenly
distributed.
5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar
adjusting screws.
● Do not exceed maximum roof rack load
weight capacity.
The crossbars (if so equipped) can be adjusted
or removed. Use the Torxdriver provided in the
tool kit (located under the 2nd row seats) to
loosen both crossbar adjusting screws.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
To adjust:
1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the
1
Torxdriver
᭺
by turning counterclockwise
᭺
A
.
CAUTION
2. When the clamp is loosened, move the
Use care when placing or removing items
from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-
ably lift the items onto the roof rack from
the ground, use a ladder or stool.
crossbar so the cargo can be positioned on
B
the crossbar
.
᭺
3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws with
the Torxdriver by turning clockwise.
Instruments and controls 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0869
LIC0870
Gear basket (if so equipped)
NOTE:
Gear basket (if so equipped)
To remove the gear basket assembly:
To open the gear basket lid:
1
Cargo in the gear basket must fit with the
lid closed. The maximum total load for the
gear basket is 30 lb (13 kg) evenly distrib-
uted. Do not force the lid closed.
1. Open the lid.
Turn the handle counterclockwise.
Raise the lid.
᭺
2. Loosen the 4 Torxா head fasteners with a
2
᭺
A
Torxdriver by turning counterclockwise
.
᭺
B
3. Lift the gear basket to remove it
4. Reverse to reinstall.
.
᭺
WARNING
The lid should be closed and locked when
driving.
5. Always check the tightness of the gear bas-
ket fasteners.
2-44 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
WIC1100
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
3. Front passenger’s side window switch
4. Right rear passenger’s window switch
5. Left rear passenger’s window switch
6. Driver’s side automatic switch
Instruments and controls 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC0343
WIC0874
LIC0410
Front passenger’s power window
Rear power window switch
Automatic operation
switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
1
window, push the switch and hold it down . To
᭺
2
close the window, pull the switch up
.
1
᭺
the window, push the switch and hold it down
.
᭺
2
To close the window, pull the switch up
.
᭺
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
2-46 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is
activated when:
●
The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
●
The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition.
The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-
utes while doors are open to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged.
3
When the switch is in the OFF position
, the
᭺
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.
LIC0792
WIC0879
CAUTION
Type A
Type B
The interior lights have a three-position switch
and operate regardless of ignition switch posi-
tion.
●
The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key,
or the power door lock switch while all doors
are closed and the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
1
When the switch is in the ON position
, the
᭺
●
●
The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-
tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes
unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.
2
When the switch is in the ON position
, the
᭺
interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds
when:
Instruments and controls 2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAP LIGHTS
CARGO LIGHT
LIC0790
LIC0590
To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
turn them off, press the switches again.
The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-
position switch. To operate, push the switch to
the desired position.
CAUTION
ON: The light is illuminated.
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
Normal (center) position: The light illuminates
when the lift gate is opened. The light turns off
when the lift gate is closed.
OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of
door position or lock status.
2-48 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Opening the fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Tilt operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
WPD0128
To protect belongings when you leave a key with
someone, give them the valet key only.
1.
Two master keys (black) with transpon-
der chip and chrome NISSAN brand
symbol on one side
Valet key (black) with transponder chip
Key number plate
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
2.
3.
4.
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
cause the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
Transponder chip
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
Opening windows (if so equipped)
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open windows equipped with automatic opera-
tion at the same time.
WARNING
●
To open the windows, turn the door key
toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
The door windows cannot be closed by the
driver’s door key.
LPD0240
Driver’s side
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1
Turning the key toward the front
locks all doors.
of the vehicle
᭺
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear
of the
᭺
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
(where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
3
returning the key to neutral
᭺
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
4
all doors
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors
will lock and then unlock automatically.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition switch and any
door open, all doors will lock and then unlock
automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
●
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
LPD0320
WPD0381
Inside lock
Driver’s side
●
All doors unlock automatically when the key
is removed from the ignition switch.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
The automatic unlock function can be de-
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver or front passenger side), to the
1
lock knob to the lock position , then close the
᭺
door.
1
lock position
, then close the door. When
locking the door this way, be certain not to leave
the key inside the vehicle.
᭺
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position
1. Close all doors.
2
.
᭺
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
door lock switch (driver or front passenger side)
2
to the unlock position
.
᭺
the
position (UNLOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
When the power door lock switch (driver or pas-
senger side) is moved to the lock position with
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
WARNING
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communica-
tion systems. Do not operate the remote
keyless entry keyfob while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not operated
unintentionally when the unit is stored for
a flight.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deac-
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the
power door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-
ger’s side).
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.
WPD0321
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends upon the conditions around
the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The keyfob will not function when:
● Do not attach the keyfob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
●
●
the battery is discharged
● Do not place the keyfob near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and per-
sonal computers.
the distance between the vehicle and the
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that key-
fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-
authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing proce-
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the keyfob:
● Do not allow the keyfob, which contains
electrical components, to come into
contact with water or salt water. This
could affect the system function.
LPD0209
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
● Do not drop the keyfob.
Locking doors
● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
another object.
1. Close all windows.
● Do not change or modify the keyfob.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the hood and all doors.
● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the
keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.
4. Press the
button on the keyfob. All
● Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures
exceed 140°F (60°C).
the doors lock. The hazard warning lights
flash twice and the horn beeps once to
indicate all doors are locked.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● When the
button is pressed with
Press the
button on the keyfob again
all doors locked, the hazard warning lights
flash twice and the horn beeps once as a
reminder that the doors are already
locked.
within 5 seconds.
●
●
All doors unlock.
The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed.
● If
the
a
door is open and you press
button, the doors will lock
The interior lights can be turned off without wait-
ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the
ignition switch and placing the ignition switch in
the ON or START position, locking the doors with
the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to
the OFF position.
but the horn will not beep and the hazard
lights will not flash.
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silenc-
ing the horn beep feature” in this section for
details.
Auto relock
LPD0210
When the
button on the keyfob is pressed,
Unlocking doors
all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
unless one of the following operations is per-
formed:
Press the
button on the keyfob once.
●
●
Only the driver’s door unlocks.
●
●
Any door is opened.
The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed with the ignition
switch in any position except the ON posi-
tion.
A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
●
The interior lights illuminate for 30 seconds
when the interior light switch is in the normal
operation position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
Using the interior lights
Press the
button on the keyfob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
in the “Instruments and controls” section in this
manual.
LPD0211
LPD0262
Using the panic alarm
Silencing the horn beep feature
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the keyfob.
by pressing and holding the
button on the
To deactivate: Press and hold the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
The panic alarm stops when:
●
●
it has run for 25 seconds, or
To activate: Press and hold the
any button is pressed on the keyfob.
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD
LIFT GATE
WARNING
WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● Always be sure the lift gate has been
closed securely to prevent it from open-
ing while driving.
● Do not drive with the lift gate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-
fore closing the lift gate.
LPD0302
1
Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel. The
hood will spring up slightly.
᭺
2
Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.
᭺
3
Insert the support rod into the slot on the
underside of the hood.
᭺
When closing the hood, return the hood rod to its
original position. Lower the hood approximately
12 inch (30 cm) above the latch and release it.
This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
LPD0322
LPD0460
LPD0323
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-
neously.
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LID
FUEL-FILLER CAP
Pull the lid to open.
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
To open the lift gate, pull up on the handle.
To close, lower and push the lift gate down se-
curely.
1
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
refueling.
while
᭺
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
WARNING
CAUTION
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
the
Malfunction Indicator Light
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
(MIL) to illuminate. If the
light
illuminates because the fuel-filler cap
is loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
The
light should turn off after a
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEERING WHEEL
SUN VISORS
3
Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)
in or out as needed.
᭺
CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-
edly downward.
LPD0304
TILT OPERATION
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the
steering wheel up or down to the desired posi-
tion.
WPD0315
1
To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
᭺
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place.
2
To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.
᭺
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIRRORS
WPD0307
WPD0126
LPD0446
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
REARVIEW MIRROR
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
1
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
The night position
reduces glare from the
᭺
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims according to the intensity of the head-
lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic
anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
2
Use the day position
hours.
when driving in daylight
᭺
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
WARNING
1
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
᭺
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the
button as described:
●
To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
the
off.
button. The indicator light will turn
WPD0170
●
To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
the button again. The indicator light
will turn on.
For more information about the
Manual control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirror can be moved in any direction
for a better rear view.
2
compass and
᭺
compass features (if so equipped), refer to
“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated mirrors (Canada only) (if so
equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
LPD0237
LPD0259
Electric control type (if so equipped)
Foldable outside mirrors
The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or ON position.
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
1
Move the small switch
to select the right or left
᭺
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
2
using the large switch
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type A). . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type B). . . . . . . . .4-10
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .4-18
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(Type A and B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VENTS
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (Type A)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
WHA1165
Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s side vents
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
1
2
, center vents , and passenger’s side vents
᭺
᭺
3
by moving the vent slide and/or vent assem-
᭺
blies.
4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— Air flows from defroster out-
lets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from de-
froster outlets.
●
When the
selected, the air recirculation
,
or
position is
mode
cannot be turned on. This prevents the win-
dows from fogging.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
LHA0489
Type A
1. Fan control dial
2. Temperature control dial
3. Air flow control dial
4. Air conditioner button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air recirculation button
Air flow control dial
Air recirculation button
The air flow control dial allows you to select the
air flow outlets.
ON position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
Press the
button to the on position when:
●
●
driving on a dusty road.
CONTROLS
to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
— Air flows from center and side
Fan control dial
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
●
for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
ditioner operation.
Defrosting or defogging
Air conditioner button
1. Push the
for normal heating. The indicator light on
the button will go off.
button to the OFF position
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired (1 to 4) position and push the
button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
light on the
button will come on. Push
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
the button again to turn off the air condi-
tioner. The indicator light on the
go off.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
button will
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
●
To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the
temperature control lever to the full HOT
position.
Rear window defroster switch
Ventilation
For more information about the rear window de-
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vent.
1. Push the
go off.
button to the OFF position.
button will
The indicator light on the
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
When the
position is selected, the air
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
●
When the
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light on the button will
not come on) if the outside temperature is
more than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow control
position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light will not illuminate) if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). If the system is in defrost mode for
more than one minute, the air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the fan
control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is
shut off, even if the air flow control dial is
turned to a position other than the
position. This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing out-
side air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defog-
ging performance.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
dial is in the
position for more than
one minute, the air conditioning system will
continue to operate until the fan control dial
is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,
even if the air flow control dial is turned to a
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield.
position other than the
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. The mode automatically
position. This
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
into the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
Bi-level heating
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Operating tips
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
1. Push the
go off.
button to the OFF position.
button will
The indicator light on the
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position, and push in the
button to
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
●
●
After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
Cooling
3. Push the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
When the air flow control dial is in the
or position, the air conditioner automati-
1. Push the
button to the off position.
cally turns on (however, the indicator light will not
illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). If one of these positions is selected
for more than one minute, the air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the fan con-
trol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,
even if the air flow control dial is turned to a
position other than these positions. This dehu-
midifies the air which helps defog the windshield.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
●
●
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
4. Push the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
The
mode automatically turns off, allowing
outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-
partment to further improve the defogging perfor-
mance.
●
For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, push the button to
the on position (indicator light on). Be sure
to return the
for normal cooling.
button to the off position
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. For additional information
on heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-
ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation
Dehumidified defogging
Operating tips
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
●
Keep the windows closed while the air con-
ditioner is in operation.
(
) button should always be in the OFF
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
position for heating and defrosting.
4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA0775
WHA0776
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA0777
WHA0778
4-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA1074
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (Type B)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
WHA1406
Type B
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
1. Fan speed control dial
2. Front window defroster button
3. Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster button
4. Air recirculation button
5. Temperature control dial
6. MAX A/C button
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
7. Air flow control buttons
8. Air conditioner button
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.
MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling
(air conditioning).
4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
ditioner operation.
Air conditioner button
1. Press the button to the OFF position
for normal heating. The indicator light on
— Air flows from defroster out-
lets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from de-
froster outlets.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and push the
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, push the
button again.
the
button will go off.
button to
2. Press the
air flow control button.
Temperature control dial
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
Air recirculation button
Ventilation
ON position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center ventilators.
For more information about the rear window and
outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,
see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
Press the
button to the on position when:
1. Press the
button to the OFF position.
button will
The indicator light on the
●
●
driving on a dusty road.
go off.
to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
●
for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
●
When the
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light on the button will
position is selected, the air
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
Defrosting or defogging
not come on) if the outside temperature is
more than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for
more than one minute, the air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the fan
control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is
shut off, or the A/C button is used to turn off
the compressor even if the air flow control
dial is turned to a position other than
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
Heating and defogging
1. Press the defrost/defog button
.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
the
which helps defog the windshield.
The mode automatically turns off, al-
lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-
senger compartment to further improve the
defogging performance.
position. This dehumidifies the air
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
●
To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest
setting and the temperature control to the
full HOT position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
1. Press the
go off.
button to the OFF position.
button will
The indicator light on the
4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
●
When the
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light on the button will
not come on) if the outside temperature is
more than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow
control button is selected for more than one
minute, the air conditioning system will con-
tinue to operate until the fan control dial is
turned to OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or the
A/C button is used to turn off the compres-
sor even if the air flow control dial is turned to
position is selected, the air
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
3. Press the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
1. Press the
2. Press the
button to the OFF position.
air flow control button.
When the
or positions are se-
lected, the air conditioner automatically turns on
(however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if
the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
If one of these air flow control buttons is selected
for more than one minute, the air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the fan con-
trol dial is turned to OFF, the air conditioner is
turned OFF, or the vehicle is shut off, even if a
position other than these positions is selected.
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
a position other than the
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
the windshield. The mode automati-
position.
4. Press the
on the
button. The indicator light
button will come on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
●
For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, push the button to
the ON position. The indicator light on
windshield. The
mode automatically turns
Operating tips
off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the
defogging performance.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
the
return the
button will come on. Be sure to
to the OFF position for nor-
mal cooling. The indicator light on the
button will go off. You may also select MAX
A/C for quick cooling.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position, and push in the
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
Operating tips
button to Dehumidified defogging
●
Keep the windows closed while the air con-
ditioner is in operation.
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
●
●
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. For additional information
on heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-
ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation
(
) button should always be in the OFF
position for heating and defrosting.
WHA0916
4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA0917
WHA0918
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA0919
WHA1362
4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
RADIO
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the PWR (power)/VOL (vol-
ume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the
radio with the engine not running, the ignition
switch should be placed in the ACC position.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Radio reception
WARNING
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio can
only be installed in vehicles that were factory
pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
LHA0099
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
CHECK DISC:
Compact disc (CD) player
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
CAUTION
CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
●
The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
PRESS EJECT:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
●
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
●
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
UNPLAYABLE:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
●
●
This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
●
●
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA (if
so equipped)
Terms:
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis-
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Mi-
crosoft Corporation of the USA.
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Mi-
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
WHA1078
Playback order chart
●
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
●
●
●
The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
Supported
versions*1
WMA
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information
Folder levels
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
Text character number limitation
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
Displayable character codes*2
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. SEEK buttons
WHA1075
Type A
6. FM·AM button
1. PRESET A·B·C button
2.
3. MENU button
4. CD insert slot
5. CD button
7. TUNE buttons
8. RPT button
9. PWR button/VOL control knob
10. RDM button
CD eject button
4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
12. SEEK button
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A and B) (if
so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
Power button and VOL control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the PWR (power) button. If
you listen to the radio with the engine not running,
place the ignition switch in the ACC position. The
mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off resumes play-
ing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR button again turns the system
off.
WHA1167
Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase
volume or to the left to decrease volume.
Type B
6. MENU button
1. PRESET A·B·C button
2.
3. FM·AM button
4. CD insert slot
5. CD button
7. TUNE button
8. RPT button
9. PWR button/VOL control knob
10. RDM button
CD eject button
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,
BALANCE and CLOCK):
Clock operation
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button
again to return to the regular clock display.
Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis-
played; use the SEEK button to turn the clock
display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).
Press the MENU button to change the mode as
follows:
Resetting the time
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio
Clock set
Hold the MENU button down and then press the
TUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol-
lows:
→ BAS
If the clock is not displayed with the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to
select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-
ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the
SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode.
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
the MENU button until the desired mode appears
in the display. Press the SEEK button to adjust
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also
use the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balance
modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the
front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the
sound between the right and left speakers.
●
If the displayed minutes before the reset are
in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed
before the reset will stay the same and the
minutes will be reset to :00.
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK
button until CLK ON appears.
●
If the displayed minutes before the reset are
in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed
before the reset will advance by one hour
and the minutes will be reset to :00.
2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will
start flashing.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
For example, if the MENU button and the
TUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the time
displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display
will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed
while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the
display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the
display will return to the audio.
3. Press the SEEK button
adjust the hour.
or
to
4. Press the MENU button again; the display
will switch to the minute adjustment mode.
NOTE:
If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU
button will change the mode as follows:
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK →
Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment →
Audio → BAS
5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK
button
or
to adjust the minutes.
FM/AM radio operation
6. Press the MENU button again to exit the
clock set mode.
FM·AM button:
For more information on setting the clock, see
“Clock set” later in this section.
Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→
FM reception.
4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change
between storage banks. The radio displays
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of
presets are active.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
TUNE buttons:
Manual tuning
2. Tune to the desired station using manual
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pressed.)
TUNE (rewind and fast
forward) buttons:
Press the TUNE
or
button for less
When the TUNE
or
button is
than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
compact disc plays at an increased speed while
rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
speed.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
To move quickly through the channels, press and
hold either TUNE
or
button down
for more than 1.5 seconds.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
SEEK buttons:
SEEK buttons:
SEEK tuning
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
When
is pressed while the compact disc
Press the SEEK
or
button to seek
is playing, the next track following the present
one starts to play from the beginning.
Press
Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-
vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-
pears in the display window. (When the last track
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins
from low to high frequencies, or high to low
frequencies, depending on which button is
pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-
tion. Once the highest broadcasting station is
reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at
the lowest broadcasting station.
several times to skip several tracks.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
Station memory operations:
When
is pressed, the track being played
several
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to
the A, B and C preset button in any combination
of AM or FM stations.
returns to the beginning. Press
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed, the CD moves back one track.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEEK (Scan CDs) button:
CD EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
Press and hold the SEEK
button for more
than 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10
seconds of a track on the compact disc. The
SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEK
When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the compact disc
will eject and the system will turn off.
or
button is pressed during the scan
mode.
CD IN indicator:
RPT button:
CD IN indicator appears on the display when the
CD is loaded with the system on.
When the RPT button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
1 ←→ Normal
1: The track that is currently playing will be re-
peated.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
RDM ←→ Normal
RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-
ing will be played randomly.
4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.
CD eject button
13. VOL control knob and PWR button
14. Station and CD select (1 – 6) buttons
15. TUNE/TRACK knob and AUDIO button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the RADIO button is pressed to
access satellite radio stations unless
optional satellite receiver and antenna
are installed and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite
radio can only be installed in vehicles
that were factory pre-wired for satellite
radio. Satellite radio is not available in
Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
WHA1172
1. PRESET A·B·C button
2. Display screen
3. DISP/CLOCK button
4. SEEK/TRACK button
5. CD button
7. AUX button
8. SCAN RPT button
9. CAT FOLDER button
10.
LOAD button
11. CD insert slot
6. RADIO button*
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume
changes as the driving speed changes.
Clock set
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if
so equipped)
1. Press the DISP/CLOCK button until it
beeps (>1.5 seconds).
AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,
FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):
2. The hours will start flashing. Press the CAT
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
FOLDER
or
button or SEEK
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
TRACK
hours.
or
button to adjust the
No satellite radio reception is available when the
RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio can
only be installed in vehicles that were factory
pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE
3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to
switch to the minute adjustment.
→ SSV (if so equipped)
To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and
Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired
mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning
knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired
level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust
Fade and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the
sound level between the front and rear speakers
and Balance adjusts the sound between the right
and left speakers.
4. Press the CAT FOLDER
or
or
button or SEEK TRACK
button to adjust the minutes.
5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exit
the clock set mode.
Audio main operation
POWER/VOLUME control:
The display will return to the regular clock display
Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON, and then
press the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys-
tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
after
7
seconds, or you may press the
DISP/CLOCK button again to return to the regu-
lar clock display.
To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or
HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.
DISP (display) button:
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
This DISP (display) button will show text about
MP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.
To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-
trol knob.
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust the
volume.
4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD display mode
MP3 display mode
Display satellite radio display mode (if so
equipped)
To change the text displayed while playing a CD
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:
Disc title ←→ Track number ←→ Track title.
To change the default display mode, press the
AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE
appears on the display, then rotate the knob to
select the following display modes: Disc number
←→ Folder number.
Once the display mode is selected, press the
AUDIO knob again to store the setting. If the
AUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, the
display will refresh with the last selected display
mode setting.
To change the text displayed when listening to an
MP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CD
with text is being used), press the DISP button.
The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as
follows: File name ←→ Folder title ←→ Art-
ist ←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number.
To change the default display mode, press the
AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE
appears on the display, then rotate the knob to
select the following display modes: File name
←→ Folder title ←→ Artist ←→ Disc number
←→ Folder number.
To change the text displayed when listening to
satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP
button. The DISP button will scroll through the
broadcast information as follows: Name ←→
Title ←→ Current display mode.
To change the default display mode press the
AUDIO button to display mode and press the
TUNE button to select the following display
modes: Channel number ←→ Channel name
←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode is
selected press the AUDIO button again to store
the setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressed
after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the
last selected display mode setting.
Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-
DIO knob again to store the setting.
●
●
●
Track title mode displays the title of the se-
lected CD track.
●
Folder number mode displays the selected
folder number and the track number that is
currently being played.
Channel number mode displays the channel
number of the selected satellite radio station.
●
●
●
Disc title mode displays the title of the CD
being played.
Channel name mode displays the channel
name of the selected satellite radio station.
●
Disc number mode displays the selected
disc number and the track number that is
currently being played.
Track number mode displays the number
selected disc and the track that is currently
being played on the disk.
Name mode displays the name of the artist,
host or weather condition of the selected
satellite radio station.
●
●
Artist mode displays the artist title of the
MP3/WMA file.
File name mode displays the track title of the
MP3/WMA file.
●
Title mode displays the song title, show
name, or temperature of the selected satel-
lite radio station.
●
Folder title mode displays the folder name
given to the MP3 folder.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.
period will stop scan tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPT
button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan
tuning moves to the next station.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM/SAT band select:
CAT FOLDER (tuning)
button:
Pushing the RADIO button will change the band
as follows:
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-
tions):
To manually tune the radio, press the CAT
AM ←→ FM or SAT (satellite, if so equipped)
When the RADIO button is pushed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
FOLDER button
ing knob to right or left.
or
or turn the tun-
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
SAT stations.
To move quickly through the channels, press and
hold either the or button down for
more than 1.5 seconds.
SEEK/TRACK tuning
The last station played will also come on when
the PWR/VOL control knob is depressed to ON.
1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the
PRESET A·B·C select button.
No satellite radio reception is available when the
RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
tenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio can
only be installed in vehicles that were factory
pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite
radio is not operational then the RADIO button is
used to toggle between AM and FM bands.
button:
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station
band.
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
or
3. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low
or low to high frequencies and stop at the next
broadcasting station.
To seek quickly through the channels, press and
hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5
seconds. When the button is released the radio
will seek to the next broadcasting station.
4. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
button is pushed, the compact disc will automati-
cally be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
SCAN RPT tuning:
Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5
seconds to stop at each broadcasting station
(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM
stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio data system (RDS):
If the system has been turned off while the com-
pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR/VOL
control knob will start the compact disc.
SEEK/TRACK button:
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
When the
button is pressed for less than
1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the
track being played returns to its beginning. Press
several times to skip back through tracks. The
compact disc will go back the number of times
the button is pressed.
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs
in the CD changer.
LOAD button:
RDS can display:
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the load
When the
button is pressed for less than
button
for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
Station name, such as “The Groove”.
1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,
the next track will start to play from its beginning.
Press several times to skip through tracks. The
compact disc will advance the number of times
the button is pressed. (When the last track on the
compact disc is skipped through, the first track
will be played.)
the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select
button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
Music or programming type such as “Clas-
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the
load button for more than 1.5 seconds.
●
Artist and song information.
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
RDS icon is displayed.
CAT FOLDER button:
CD button:
Compact disc (CD) changer operation
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
While playing a CD, press and hold the CAT
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
label side facing up. The compact disc will be
guided automatically into the slot and start play-
FOLDER button
or
to fast forward
or rewind a track on a CD.
When the CD button is pressed with the com-
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio
will automatically be turned off and the compact
disc will start to play.
MP3 CAT FOLDER button:
ing. To insert the disc, first press the
button.
LOAD
While playing an MP3 CD, press the CAT
FOLDER button
or
to scan back-
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
ward or forward through available folders.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the CAT FOLDER button
CD EJECT:
or
to fast forward or rewind a track on an
MP3 CD.
Current/Selected disc:
CD select buttons:
●
Press the
button, then press the slot
number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The
compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-
ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded
disc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is not
removed within 15 seconds, the disc will
reload.
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a
CD select button (1 – 6).
SCAN/RPT:
When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushed
while the compact disc is played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
All discs:
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT
→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC
RPT
●
Press and hold the
button for more
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
WHA1168
AUX jack (if so equipped)
1
within 20 seconds or the
button is
ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
be repeated.
1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing
will be repeated
ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be
played randomly
1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
rently playing will be played randomly
The AUX jack
is located above the power
᭺
pressed again during the eject sequence,
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
celed.
outlet. The AUX audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a por-
table cassette tape player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
When this button is pressed while a compact
disc is playing, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX jack.
CD IN indicator:
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
only.
4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
WHA1095
LHA0049
Type A
1. Volume control switch
2. MODE select switch
3. POWER on/off switch
4. Tuning switch
CD CARE AND CLEANING
●
●
●
Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
●
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER on/off switch
Tuning
Memory change (radio):
Push the tuning switch (
than 1.5 seconds to change to the next or previ-
ous preset.
If you have the Type A switch, with the ignition
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push
the POWER switch to turn the audio system on
or off.
or
) for less
If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push
the MODE switch to turn the audio system on.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch (
or
) for
more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-
ous radio station.
MODE select switch
Push the mode select switch to change the
modes:
Next/Previous track (CD):
LHA1087
PRESET A → PRESET B → PRESET C → CD*
Push the tuning switch
or
for less
Type B
1. Volume control switch
2. Phone operation switch
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
→ AUX** → PRESET A
*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.
3. Power on and MODE select switch
4. Tuning switch
**This mode is only available when a compatible
auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.
Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):
Push the SEEK tuning switch
or
for
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
Volume control switch
more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing
disc up or down.
Push the volume control switch up or down to
increase or decrease the volume.
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
ANTENNA
CAUTION
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be
removed. When you need to remove the antenna,
turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock-
wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification
using a suitable tool such as an open-end
wrench. The antenna rod tightening specification
is 2.0 – 2.6 N·m (18 – 23 in-lb). Do not use pliers
to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on
the antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot be
hand tightened to the proper specification.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
WARNING
● A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
CAUTION
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
Always properly tighten the antenna rod
during installation or the antenna rod may
break during vehicle operation.
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage con-
trol system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely. Refer to “Vari-
able voltage control system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion later in this manual.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
● Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
WHA1359
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
●
●
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
●
Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
●
●
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting instruc-
tions.
1. This device may not cause interference and
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
later in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IC Regulatory information
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
which takes a few seconds. If the
button is
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
●
If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
●
If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon.
●
●
If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
USING THE SYSTEM
●
●
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone
System.
also press and hold the
button on the
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
and release the
button located on the
Initialization
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
Example: 1-800-662-6200
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
pressing the
wheel.
button on the steering
●
●
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
press the
button and after the tone
say, “Call Redial.”
●
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue en-
tering digits, if desired.
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
NOTE:
The combined command of Call and (a
Name) cannot be used.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
How to say numbers
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
– “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
●
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “six two zero zero”
–
“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
●
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Special Dialing” com-
mand and the “Send” command during a
call).
–
“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
●
Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
Dialing” in this section for more information.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choosing a language
You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition system
2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND button for the
(
)
is active, press and hold the
button for 5 seconds to quit the
voice recognition system at any
time.
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END (
ferent language.”
) button to select a dif-
button.
LHA1086
CONTROL BUTTONS
3. Press the
TUNING SWITCH
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode”in this sec-
tion.
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.
PHONE/SEND
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
Press the
button to initiate a
GETTING STARTED
VR session or answer an incoming
call.
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.
press the PHONE/SEND (
select a different language, tilt the tuning
switch ( or ) up or down.
) button. To
4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
NOTE:
3. Say: “Add phone” . The system acknowl-
᭺
Making a call by entering a phone
number
edges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset
You must press the
seconds to change the language.
button within 5
C
.
᭺
Main Menu
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Own-
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
A
“Call”
᭺
B
“Phone Number”
᭺
C
Speak the digits
᭺
D
“Dial”
᭺
Connecting procedure
1. Press the
button on the steering
NOTE:
wheel. A tone will sound.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
A
2. Say: “Call”
. The system acknowledges
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
᭺
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
D
phone
.
᭺
Main Menu
B
A
“Connect phone”
᭺
3. Say “Phone Number”
. The system ac-
᭺
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
B
“Add phone”
᭺
C
Initiate from handset
᭺
D
Name phone
᭺
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
C
the area code in single digit format . If the
᭺
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
A
2. Say: “Connect phone”
. The system ac-
᭺
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-
bers” in this section for more information.
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
“Call”
Main Menu
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name)
“Call”
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands.
A
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
᭺
“Phone Number”
(Speak Digits)
B
᭺
D
6. Say: “Dial”
. The system acknowledges
᭺
C
“Special Number”
᭺
the command and makes the call.
When you press and release the
button on
D
“Redial”
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu.
᭺
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
E
“Call Back”
᭺
A
(Speak Name)
Receiving a call
᭺
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.
NOTE:
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
If there are multiple locations associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
tion.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
(Speak Digits)
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back”and
ends the VR session.
●
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
phone when privacy is desired.
᭺
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
During a call
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
During a call there are several command options
C
“Special Number”
᭺
available. Press the
button on the steering
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands.
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetoothா Hands-Free System,
●
“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
press the
button.
●
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
D
“Redial”
᭺
●
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
●
●
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
NOTE:
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*”or “#”during
a call. For example, if you were directed to
dial an extension by an automated system:
E
“Call back”
᭺
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
“Transfer entry”
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
᭺
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
NOTE:
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Main Menu
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Phonebook”
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
A
“Transfer Entry”
᭺
B
“Delete Entry”
᭺
C
“List Names”
᭺
B
“Delete Entry”
᭺
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா pro-
file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
C
“List names”
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
NOTE:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record Name” in this section.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
NOTE:
NOTE:
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Main Menu
A
“List names”
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
“Phonebook”
Enter a phone number by voice command:
A
“List Names”
᭺
B
“Transfer Entry”
᭺
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
C
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
“Delete Entry”
᭺
D
“Record Name”
᭺
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-
tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
that entry.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record Name” command in this section for in-
formation about recording custom voice tags for
list entries that the system has difficulty pro-
nouncing.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
B
“Transfer entry”
᭺
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetoothா system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming or missed calls.
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetoothா function on the vehicle.
A
“Outgoing”
᭺
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
A
“Add Phone”
᭺
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
B
“Incoming”
᭺
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
C
“Delete Entry”
᭺
B
“Select Phone”
᭺
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
C
“Missed”
᭺
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
D
“Record name”
᭺
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.
“Connect Phone”
C
“Delete Phone”
᭺
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete that phonebook for that phone.
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”
᭺
Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent
a wireless connection to your phone.
Main Menu
A
“Add Phone”
᭺
“Recent Calls”
B
“Select Phone”
᭺
A
“Outgoing”
᭺
B
“Incoming”
᭺
C
“Missed”
᭺
C
“Delete Phone”
᭺
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”
᭺
4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Training phrases
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model of
their own voice that is stored in the system. The
system is capable of storing a different speaker
adaptation model for each connected phone.
During the SA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
phonebook transfer entry
dial three oh four two nine
delete call back number
incoming
7. When preparation is complete and you are
Training procedure
ready to begin, press the
button.
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
transfer entry
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
eight pause nine three two pause seven
delete all entries
call seven two four zero nine
phonebook delete entry
next entry
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park).
10. The system will announce that speaker ad-
aptation has been completed and the sys-
tem is ready.
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
dial star two one seven oh
yes
The SA mode will stop if:
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND button for the
●
The
button is pressed for more than 5
seconds in SA mode.
(
)
no
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
●
●
The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.
select
PHONE/END (
ferent language.”
) button to select a dif-
button.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
missed
dial eight five six nine two
Bluetooth on
5. Press the
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
outgoing
●
●
●
go back
●
To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
(
call five six two eight zero
dial six six four three seven
call three one nine oh two
nine seven pause pause three oh eight
cancel
MANUAL CONTROL
●
●
To select the current menu option, press the
call back number
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
PHONE/SEND (
To go back to the previous menu, press the
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current
) button.
call star two zero nine five
delete phone
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
dial eight three zero five one
record name
PHONE/END (
Phone system.
) button will exit the
four three pause two nine pause zero
delete redial number
phonebook list names
call eight oh five four one
correction
●
To exit the manual control mode, press and
holding the PHONE/END (
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
) button. At that
hold the PHONE/END (
seconds.
) button for 5
) button
Operating tips
●
To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
(
connect phone
speak ЉShowing Manual OptionsЉ when
dial seven four oh one eight
previous entry
manual controls are initially activated.
delete
dial nine seven two six six
call seven six three oh one
4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-pavement and off-road driving
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . .5-12
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .5-34
Hill start assist system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Engine block heater (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
WARNING
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
● Keep the lift gate and rear windows
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passen-
ger compartment. If you must drive with
the lift gate or rear windows open, fol-
low these precautions:
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
WARNING
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
● If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the lift gate or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle.
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by
whenever:
a
qualified mechanic
5-2 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
all 4 tires to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
usual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
Additional information:
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
●
The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
Starting and driving 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
WARNING
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
of all 4 tires are adjusted. After the tires are
inflated to the recommended pressure, the
vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16
MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and
turn off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
●
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.
●
The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
5-4 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some examples are:
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
They have higher ground clearance than passen-
ger cars to make them capable of performing in a
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
This gives them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing
you to anticipate problems. However, they are not
designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-
form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at
all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
Be sure to read the driving safety precautions
later in this section.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.
Starting and driving 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
WARNING
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-
ing the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not over react.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure
below. Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
hicle, road and traffic.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
5-6 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you may stall. If
you drive down them, you may not be
able to control your speed. If you drive
across them, you may roll over.
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-
ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for
leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-
hicle.
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
● Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
Remember that two-wheel drive models are less
capable than four-wheel drive models for rough
road driving and extrication when stuck in deep
snow or mud, or the like.
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
or other hazard that could cause an
accident.
Please observe the following precautions:
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill, never at-
tempt to turn around. Your vehicle
could tip or roll over. Always back
straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never
back down in N (Neutral) or with the
clutch depressed (manual transmission
vehicles), using only the brake, as this
could cause loss of control.
WARNING
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
● Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
● Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
resulting in loss of control and an acci-
dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
gear to control your speed. Use the hill
● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-
stead drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
tip over sideways much more easily
than they can forward or backward.
descent
control
feature
(if
so
equipped).
Starting and driving 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
when driving over rough terrain. Prop-
erly secure all cargo so it will not be
thrown forward and cause injury to you
or your passengers.
● Do not drive beyond the performance
capability of the tires, even with 4WD
engaged.
●
If at all possible, avoid sharp turning ma-
neuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your
NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle has a
higher center of gravity than a passenger
car. The vehicle is not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as passenger
cars. Failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly could result in loss of control
and/or a rollover accident.
●
For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-
tempt to raise two wheels off the ground
and shift the transmission to any drive or
reverse position with the engine running.
Doing so may result in drivetrain damage
or unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle damage or
personal injury.
●
To avoid raising the center of gravity ex-
cessively, do not exceed the rated capac-
ity of the roof rack/gear bin (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the load.
Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as
far forward and as low as possible. Do
not equip the vehicle with tires larger
than specified in this manual. This could
cause your vehicle to roll over.
● Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
●
Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such
as the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using the
wrong test equipment may result in drive-
train damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move sud-
denly and injure your hands. Instead
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers have
their seat belts fastened.
● Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may become hot.
● Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-
fected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure better vehicle control.
● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-
ately after driving in mud or water. See
“Brake system” later in this section for
“Wet brakes”.
● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.
● Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance
may be required. See “Periodic mainte-
nance” in the “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide.”
● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
5-8 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the key from the ignition switch:
WARNING
1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
● Never remove the ignition key or place
the ignition switch in the LOCK position
while driving. The steering wheel will
lock (for models with a steering lock
mechanism). This may cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle and could
result in serious vehicle damage or per-
sonal injury.
2. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
3. Remove the key from the ignition.
If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park)
position after the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot
be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as
follows to remove the key.
WSD0041
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)
position.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON
position.
The ignition lock is designed so the ignition
switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position
and the key removed until the shift selector is
moved to the P (Park) position.
3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key.
The shift selector is designed so it cannot moved
out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF
position or if the key is removed from the switch.
When removing the key from the ignition, make
sure the shift selector is in the P (Park) position.
If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)
position, the ignition switch cannot be moved to
the LOCK position.
The shift selector can be moved if the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.
Starting and driving 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.
When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the steering wheel is not locked (for mod-
els with a steering lock mechanism).
KEY POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (Not used) (1)
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the steer-
ing wheel slightly right and left.
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
START: (4)
WSD0052
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automati-
cally returns to the ON position.
If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-
tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or
right while turning the key to unlock the
key cylinder.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-
ing.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position from the ACC or
ON position, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, push the key in, then place the ignition
switch in LOCK position.
5-10 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING THE ENGINE
●
●
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
1. Apply the parking brake.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
2. Automatic transmission:
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least when-
ever you refuel.
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift selector cannot be moved out
of the P (Park) position and into any of
the other gear positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position or
if the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
●
●
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
●
●
●
●
Lock all doors.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift selector is in any of the driving
positions.
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
Position seat and adjust head restraints.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately 10
seconds.
Manual transmission:
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-
press the clutch pedal to the floor while
cranking the engine.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
●
Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON (3)
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-
pressed.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by placing the ignition
switch in the START position. Release the
key when the engine starts. If the engine
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
procedure.
Starting and driving 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
key and the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by plac-
ing the ignition in the START position.
Release the key when the engine starts. If
the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat
the above procedure.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
selector out of the P (Park) position.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
The automatic transmission is designed so
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive
position while the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the key off and wait 10
seconds before cranking again, otherwise
the starter could be damaged.
CAUTION
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
brake should be used for this purpose.
The shift selector cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of the
other gear positions if the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
5-12 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the
parking brake first, then move the shift selector
into the P (Park) position.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-
tor is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC
position for any reason while the vehicle is in N
(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition
switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position
and the key cannot be removed from the ignition
switch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
position, then the ignition switch can be placed in
LOCK.
R (Reverse):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
LSD0151
To move the shift selector:
P (Park):
: Push the button while depressing the
brake pedal
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
drive position to R (Reverse).
CAUTION
: Push the button to shift
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
: Shift without depressing brake pedal
Shifting
N (Neutral):
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector out of the P
(Park) position.
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
Starting and driving 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D (Drive):
2WD:
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
3 (Third gear):
62 MPH (100 km/h)
4H:
Use this position for driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking would be advanta-
geous.
62 MPH (100 km/h)
4LO:
21 MPH (35 km/h)
1 (Low gear):
Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the follow-
ing speeds in the 3 position.
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,
or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
2WD:
99 MPH (160 km/h)
4H:
LSD0141
Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the follow-
ing speeds in the 1 position.
Shift lock release
99 MPH (160 km/h)
4LO:
If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may
not be moved from the P (Park) position even with
the brake pedal depressed.
2WD:
37 MPH (60 km/h)
2 (Second gear):
37 MPH (60 km/h)
4H:
To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.
The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).
However, the steering wheel will be locked un-
less the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion (for models with a steering lock mechanism).
This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery
is discharged.
Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-
ing on downhill grades.
37 MPH (60 km/h)
4LO:
Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the follow-
ing speeds in the 2 position.
12 MPH (20 km/h)
5-14 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-
lowing procedure:
WARNING
If the shift selector cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown.
Accelerator downshift
— in D position —
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift lock
release.
LSD0142
Overdrive switch
6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
to unlock the steering wheel (for models with
a steering lock mechanism).
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-
sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.
7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-
sired location.
ON:
With the engine running and the
shift selector in the D (Drive)
position, the transmission upshifts
into Overdrive as vehicle speed
increases.
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-
matic transmission system as soon as possible.
Overdrive does not engage until the engine
has reached operating temperature.
Starting and driving 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF:
For driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking is nec-
essary push the Overdrive switch
once. The O/D OFF indicator light
in the instrument panel comes on at
this time.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
When cruising at a low speed or climbing a
gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift
shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of
Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the
Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The
O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel
comes on at this time.
● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.
CAUTION
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
LSD0148
When driving conditions change, depress the
Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.
Shifting
● Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-
tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.
This reduces fuel economy.
To change gears, or when upshifting or down-
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
● Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-
tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed
before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise
may be heard. Transmission damage could oc-
cur.
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,
4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to
vehicle speed.
5-16 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To back up depress the shift selector and then
move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping
the vehicle completely.
●
4–wheel drive model (4L position):
Allowable maximum speed in each gear:
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
MPH (km/h)
2–wheel drive models
—
—
—
—
—
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
MPH (km/h)
35 (56)
60 (97)
87 (141)
—
If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R
(Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First).
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
4th
5th
6th
—
—
If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel drive, see
“Transfer case shifting procedures” later in this
section.
Suggested maximum speed in each
gear
4–wheel drive models
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Suggested upshift speeds
2H/4H position
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
MPH (km/h)
34 (55)
60 (97)
87 (140)
—
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will en-
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
—
—
6th
●
Two-wheel drive models and four-wheel
drive models (2H and 4H position):
4L position
GEAR
1st
MPH (km/h)
13 (21)
22 (36)
33 (53)
45 (72)
57 (93)
—
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
MPH (km/h)
11 (18)
17 (27)
25 (40)
32 (51)
45 (72)
2nd
3rd
4th
4th to 5th
5th
5th to 6th
6th
Starting and driving 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift selector in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
LSD0150
WSD0153
A
To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up
.
1. ACCEL/RES switch
2. COAST/SET switch
3. ON/OFF switch
᭺
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
4. CANCEL switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)
position.
●
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
Automatic transmission models:
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
B
slightly, push the button
lever completely .
and lower the
᭺
●
If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
5-18 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control main switch is turned ON
●
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depressing
the clutch pedal when the cruise control is
set. Should this occur, depress the clutch
pedal and turn the main switch off imme-
diately. Failure to do so may cause engine
damage.
while
pushing
the
ACCEL/RES,
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located
on the steering wheel). To properly set the
cruise control system, use the following pro-
cedures.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
●
●
●
Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
light in the instrument panel goes out.
WARNING
Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE
indicator light and SET indicator light in the
instrument panel go out.
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
To turn on the cruise control, push the main
switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment panel comes on.
●
you depress the brake or clutch pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
●
●
the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
mission), or move the shift selector to N
(Neutral) (automatic transmission).
●
To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
Starting and driving 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and en-
sure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
ened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
●
●
●
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
●
●
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
●
Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
●
Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●
●
●
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Keep your engine tuned up.
●
●
●
●
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
●
●
●
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
●
●
●
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
5-20 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) (if so equipped)
●
●
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
WARNING
CAUTION
● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-
tempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-
hicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-
ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
and increased fuel consumption.
For vehicles equipped with
, use 4H
or 4L position only when necessary. Four-
wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
you are driving on dry hard surface
roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
vehicle on
a
2-wheel dynamometer
(such as the dynamometers used by
some states for emissions testing), or
similar equipment even if the other two
wheels are raised off the ground. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may
result in drivetrain damage or unex-
pected vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage or per-
sonal injury.
– in the 4LO position for automatic
transmission vehicles, stop the ve-
hicle and shift the shift selector to
the N position with the brake pedal
depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position for manual trans-
mission vehicles, stop the vehicle
and shift the shift selector to the N
position with the clutch pedal de-
pressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Starting and driving 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING
PROCEDURES
The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions
(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the
desired drive mode according to the driving con-
ditions.
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:
Indicator Light
Transfer 4LO position
4WD Shift
Switch Position
Wheels
Driven
Use Conditions
4WD Shift Procedure
4WD shift
Move the 4WD switch.
2WD <—> 4H
4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position en-
gaged.
For driving on dry, paved
roads (Economy drive)
Rear wheels
2WD
4H
For driving on rocky, sandy
or snow-covered roads
4 wheels
Neutral
Neutral disengages the
automatic transmission
mechanical parking lock,
which will allow the vehicle
to roll. Do not leave the
transfer shift position in
Neutral.*2
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. For automatic transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector to
the (N) position with the brake pedal depressed.
For manual transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector to the
(N) position with the clutch depressed.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the
4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal de-
pressed.
*1
May blink
For manual transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the 4WD
switch to 4LO or 4H with the clutch pedal depressed.
THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND
4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE
VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE
SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-
SION VEHICLES. FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES
YOU MUST MOVE THE SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3
4LO
4 wheels
For use when maximum
power and traction is re-
quired (for example: on
steep grades or rocky,
sandy, muddy roads)
Illuminated
5-22 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*1: Before moving the shift selector from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed
and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind,
not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.
- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.
1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch ЉOFFЉ.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
3. Apply the parking brake, for automatic transmission vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position. For manual
transmission vehicles, move the shift selector to Neutral position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed on automatic transmission vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on manual transmission vehicles, move the 4WD
shift switch to desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator
lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The
also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” later in this section.
indicator light (if so equipped) will
Starting and driving 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the
driving conditions. There are three types of drive
modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-
ing and remain illuminated or turn off
before shifting the transmission into
gear. If the shift selector is shifted from
the (N) position to any other gear when
the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the
vehicle may move unexpectedly.
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-
tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on
steep downhill grades. Use the engine
brake and low automatic transmission
gears (D1 or D2) or manual transmis-
sion (1st gear or 2nd gear) for engine
braking.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to
move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
wheels spinning.
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle
MUST be stationary, shift the shift selector
to Neutral (N), and for automatic transmis-
sion vehicles depress the brake pedal or
for manual transmission vehicles depress
the clutch pedal. The switch must be de-
pressed and turned when changing into or
out of 4LO.
CAUTION
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-
tween 4LO and 4H while driving.
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry
hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause
unnecessary noise and tire wear.
NISSAN recommends driving in the
2WD position under these conditions.
● The 4H position provides greater trac-
tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will
cause increased fuel consumption and
higher oil temperatures, and could
damage
drivetrain
components.
Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is
not recommended
● The 4WD transfer case may not be
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-
bient temperatures and the transfer
4LO position indicator light may blink
even when the 4WD shift switch is
shifted. After driving for a while you can
change the 4WD transfer case between
4H and 4LO.
WARNING
● When parking, apply the parking brake
before stopping the engine and make
sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is
on and the ATP warning light goes off.
Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-
edly move even if the automatic trans-
mission is in the P position.
● The 4LO position provides maximum
power and traction. Avoid raising ve-
hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-
mum speed is approximately 31 MPH
(50 km/h).
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch when
making a turn or reversing.
When driving on rough roads,
●
●
Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
Drive carefully according to the road surface
conditions.
5-24 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle is stuck,
●
When the vehicle is stopped after mak-
ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt
after the shift selector is shifted to N or
P. This occurs because the transfer
clutch is released and not because of a
malfunction.
●
●
Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential
(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn the
switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and
apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle.
CAUTION
●
●
If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the
vehicle back and forth between reverse and
drive gears.
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch when
making a turn or reversing.
If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place
stones or wooden blocks under the tires.
Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire
chains may be effective.
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while
driving on steep downhill grades. Use
the engine brake and low automatic
transmission gears (D1 or D2) or
manual transmission (1st gear or 2nd
gear) for engine braking.
LSD0145
4WD shift switch operations
CAUTION
●
Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the
2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on
driving conditions.
● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires
will sink deep into the mud, making it
difficult to free the vehicle.
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
with the rear wheels spinning.
●
If the 4WD shift switch is operated
while making a turn, accelerating or
decelerating or if the key switch is
turned off while in the 4H or 4LO posi-
tion, you may feel a jolt. This is not
abnormal.
● Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may
cause malfunction.
● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the
vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100
km/h). Failure to do so can damage the
4WD system.
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-
tween 4LO and 4H while driving.
Starting and driving 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the
4WD indicator light goes out.
The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after
the engine is started.
CAUTION
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system
when the ignition switch is ON, the warning light
will either remain illuminated or blink.
If the 4WD shift indicator light indication
changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift
switch is shifted to the 4H position at low
ambient temperatures, the 2WD mode
may be being engaged due to malfunc-
tioning drive system. If the indicator does
not return to normal and the 4WD warning
light comes on, have the system checked
by the nearest NISSAN dealer.
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD
shift indicator light goes out.
A large difference between the diameters of front
and rear wheels will make the warning light blink
slowly (about once per two seconds). Change
the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive
fast.
LSD0147
4WD warning light
4WD shift indicator light
CAUTION
The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the
odometer display.
Comes on or blinks
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
slowly during operation, have your ve-
hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
Warning light
when:
The light should turn off within 1 second after
turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
There is a mal-
function in the
4–wheel drive
Comes on
● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not
recommended when the 4WD warning
light turns on.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-
cator light will illuminate the position selected by
the 4WD shift switch.
system
The difference in
wheel rotation is
Blinks
slowly
●
The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
while shifting from one drive mode to
the other. When the shifting is com-
pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light
will come on.
large
The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.
5-26 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
The E-Lock system can provide additional trac-
tion and should only be used when a vehicle has
become or is becoming stuck. This system oper-
ates by electronically “locking” the two rear drive
wheels together, allowing them to turn at the
same speed. The system is used when it is not
possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using
the 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles).
● When the warning light comes on, the
2WD mode may be engaged even if the
4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially
careful when driving. If corresponding
parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD
mode will not be engaged even if the
4WD shift switch is shifted.
– in the 4LO position for manual trans-
mission vehicles, stop the vehicle
and shift the shift selector to the N
position with the clutch pedal de-
pressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-
ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
and increased fuel consumption.
When added traction is required, activate the
E-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See
“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-
tem switch” in the “Instruments and Controls”
section. Once the system fully engages, the indi-
cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON.
When the system is activated, both rear wheels
will engage, providing added traction.
● The transfer case may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warning
light blinking.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
you are driving on dry hard surface
roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to
engage the system, and the system will only
engage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h).
Once the vehicle is free, the system should be
turned OFF and driving resumed.
– in the 4LO position for automatic
transmission vehicles, stop the ve-
hicle and shift the shift selector to
the N position with the brake pedal
depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled
and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock
system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light
illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.
Starting and driving 5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
CAUTION
● Never leave the E-Lock system ON
when driving on paved or hard-surfaced
roads. Turning the vehicle may result in
the rear wheels slipping and result in an
accident and personal injury. After us-
ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-
hicle, turn the system OFF.
● After using the E-Lock system, turn the
switch OFF to prevent possible damage
to driveline components from extended
use.
● Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster
than 12 mph (20 km/h) when the system
is engaged. Doing so could damage
drivetrain components.
● Use the E-Lock system only when free-
ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position
before using the E-Lock system. Never
use the E-Lock system on a slippery
road surface such as snow or ice sur-
face. Using the E-Lock system when
driving in these road conditions may
cause unexpected movement of the ve-
hicle during engine braking, accelerat-
ing or turning, which may result in an
accident and serious personal injury.
● Do not turn on the E-lock system while
the tires are spinning. Doing so could
damage drivetrain components.
5-28 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill grade,
place the shift selector in 1st gear.
Automatic transmission models:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
A
●
●
●
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
WSD0050
Make sure the shift selector has been
pushed as far forward as it can go and
cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
B
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for
automatic transmission models or in an
appropriate gear for manual transmis-
sion models. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in an accident.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
C
CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key.
Starting and driving 5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at 2 wheels.
WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
in sharp turns and at low speeds.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.
5-30 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the
“Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
Normal operation
WARNING
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
ber that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
sible for safety.
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
quired while driving.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces.
Self-test feature
Using the system
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
Starting and driving 5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)
SYSTEM
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
●
ABLS is a form of traction control using
sensors from the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) to transfer power from a slipping drive
wheel to a wheel with more traction. The
ABLS system applies braking to the slipping
wheel, which helps redirect power to an-
other wheel.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,
the VDC System helps to preform the following
functions:
●
Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
●
●
On 4WD models the ABLS system operates
in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode is
engaged, the ABLS system will operate for
both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the
ABLS system operates on the drive axle
only.
●
●
Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
The ABLS system is always ON unless the
system detects brake pad overheating. If
high brake pad temperature is detected, it
will turn OFF, but normal brake function will
continue. ABLS will function even when the
VDC system is turned OFF.
If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO
the
indicator light will come on and
the VDC system will be turned off. See “Us-
ing Four Wheel Drive (4WD)” earlier in this
section.
●
Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following condi-
tions:
WARNING
The ABLS system provides increased trac-
tion, but will not prevent accidents due to
abrupt steering operation or by careless
driving or dangerous driving practices.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces, and always drive
carefully.
– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steer-
ing input)
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
5-32 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it can not prevent loss
of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The SLIP
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
functions are off and the SLIP indicator will not
flash.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
formance, and the SLIP indicator may
When the VDC system operates, the SLIP indi-
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the
following:
●
The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
flash or both the SLIP and
tor lights may illuminate.
indica-
●
You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system my not
operate properly and both the SLIP and
●
Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
the
indicator
lights
may
illuminate.
See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the ”Instru-
ments and controls” section.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
ing operation at high speeds or by care-
less or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
deteriorated, both the SLIP and
indicator lights may illuminate.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the SLIP
and
indicator lights come on in the instru-
ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns
off when these indicator lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The indicator illuminates to indi-
cate the VDC system is off.
Starting and driving 5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
centrate on steering while reducing the burden of
brake and accelerator operation.
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate prop-
erly and the SLIP indicator may flash or
WARNING
● Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle speed
when driving on steep down hill grades.
Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the hill descent control sys-
tem and decelerate the vehicle speed
by depressing the brake pedal if neces-
sary. Be especially careful when driving
on frozen, muddy or an extremely steep
downhill roads. Failure to control ve-
hicle speed may result in a loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and possible serious
injury or death.
●
When additional braking is required on
steep downhill roads activate the hill de-
scent control system by pushing the switch
ON, see “Hill descent control switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section.
both the SLIP and
indicator lights
may illuminate. Do not drive on these
types of roads.
●
Once the system is activated the indicator
light will remain on in the instrument panel,
see “Hill descent control system on indicator
light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the SLIP indicator may flash or
both the SLIP and
indicator lights
may illuminate. This is not a malfunc-
tion. Restart the engine after driving
onto a stable surface.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
while the hill descent control system is on, the
system will stop operating temporarily. As soon
as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the
hill descent control system begins to function
again if the hill descent control operating condi-
tions are fulfilled.
● The hill descent control may not control
the vehicle speed on a hill under all load
or road conditions. Always be prepared
to depress the brake pedal to control
vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-
sult in a collision or serious personal
injury.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
the SLIP indicator may flash or both the
SLIP and
illuminate.
indicator lights may
For the best results, when descending steep
downhill grades, the hill descent control switch
should be ON and the shift selector in 2 (Second
gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
The hill descent control system helps maintain
vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph
(25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill
descent control is useful when engine braking
alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed.
Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to
control vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-
5-34 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
The hill start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards in the time it takes the
driver to release the brake pedal and apply the
accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
WARNING
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so
equipped).
● Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing backward on a hill. Always drive
carefully and attentively. Depress the
brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped on a steep hill. Be especially
careful when stopped on a hill on frozen
or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards may re-
sult in a loss of control of the vehicle
and possible serious injury or death.
Hill start assist will operate automatically under
the following conditions:
ANTI-FREEZE
●
The shift selector is shifted to a forward or
reverse gear.
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
●
The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill
by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2
seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill
start assist will stop operating completely.
● The hill start assist system is not de-
signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill
on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll backwards and may result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
BATTERY
Hill start assist will not operate when the shift
selector is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level
road.
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● The hill start assist may not prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill
under all load or road conditions. Al-
ways be prepared to depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards. Failure to do so may result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
Starting and driving 5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tire chains may be used. For details see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
●
●
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
●
●
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
Extra windshield-washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
WARNING
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
5-36 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
● Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.
Starting and driving 5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
5-38 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 In case of emergency
First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . .6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-
vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer
to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-
ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “Starting and driving” section.
LCE0114
A first aid kit is located on the back door trim
panel. To remove the first aid kit:
1
Squeeze the latch buttons.
᭺
2
Pull the two straps apart to unfasten.
᭺
6-2 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
WARNING
WARNING
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the auto-
matic transmission into P (Park).
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R
(Reverse), or the automatic transmission
into P (Park).
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WCE0044
LCE0115
LCE0117
3. Find the oval-shaped opening above the
middle of the bumper. Pass the T-shaped
end of the jack rod through the opening and
direct it toward the spare tire winch, located
directly above the spare tire.
Blocking wheels
Getting the spare tire and tools
1
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
1. Fold the rear bench seat cushion forward.
Refer to “Folding the 2nd row bench seat” in
the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system” section earlier in
this manual.
᭺
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
2
to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
᭺
jacked up.
CAUTION
WARNING
2. Remove the jack and jacking tools.
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as
shown.
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
6-4 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod
counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
6. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,
reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer
chain, and carefully slide the tire from under
the rear of the vehicle.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for
vehicles
with
limited
slip
CAUTION
differentials.
Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-
ing plate on the wheel and then lift the
spare tire.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
Always refer to the illustration for the correct
placement and jack-up points for your specific
vehicle model and jack type.
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
WCE0153
4. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the
square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form
a handle.
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
5. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into
the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-
ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in
In case of emergency 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WCE0154
LCE0087
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The
front tire jack-up points are indicated by
stamped arrows on the side of the frame.
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack
as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the
tire clears the ground.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the
tire.
6-6 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-
hicle completely.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located in
the driver’s door opening.
WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
ment in the vehicle.
WARNING
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
WCE0063
Installing the spare tire
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with
wrench.
a
torque
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed.
● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
6-8 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.
WCE0066
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
or to P (Park) (automatic transmission).
Switch off all unnecessary electrical sys-
tems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal
injury.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other.
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
A
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺
B
C
D
lustrated (
,
,
,
).
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
In case of emergency 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH STARTING
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
WARNING
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
CAUTION
● Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
● Automatic transmission models cannot
be push-started or tow-started. At-
tempting to do so may cause transmis-
sion damage.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
● For manual transmission models, never
try to start the vehicle by towing it.
When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.
If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift selector
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (automatic transmission).
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time.
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
6-10 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.
In case of emergency 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-wheel drive models
●
If you have to tow manual transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground (if you do not use towing dol-
lies) or four wheels on the ground:
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
● Always release the parking brake.
CAUTION
● Move the transmission shift selector
to the N (Neutral) position
● Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the front wheels
raised always use towing dollies under
the rear wheels.
● Observe the following restricted tow-
ing speeds and distances for manual
transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles (805
km)
If the speed or distance must necessarily be
greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing
to prevent damage to the transmission.
● When towing automatic or manual
transmission models with the front
wheels on the ground or on towing
dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism (for models with a
steering lock mechanism).
WCE0196
A
Automatic Transmissions (A/T)
Manual Transmissions (M/T)
᭺
B
᭺
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
6-12 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WCE0162
LCE0103
Four-wheel drive models
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the ve-
hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
Never tow 4WD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
transfer case and transmission.
In case of emergency 6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (automatic
Pulling a stuck vehicle
CAUTION
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the re-
covery device manufacturer’s instructions.
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the main structural members of
the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so
equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body
will be damaged.
transmission models) or 1st and
(manual transmission models).
R
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
Attach the tow strap to the towing hook (if so
equipped).
5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
● Use the towing hook (if so equipped)
only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,
snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle
for a long distance using only the tow-
ing hook.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
● The towing hook is under tremendous
force when used to free a stuck vehicle.
Never pull the hook at an angle.
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-
tem.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
● Always pull the cable straight out from
the front or rear of the vehicle.
● Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the sus-
pension, steering, brake or cooling
systems.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (automatic transmission
models) or 1st (low) and R (Reverse)
(manual transmission models).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
6-14 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
●
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
●
●
after driving on coastal roads.
WAXING
when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
●
when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
●
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
●
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
WASHING
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
7-2 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHROME PARTS
REMOVING SPOTS
CAUTION
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electri-
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
UNDERBODY
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
CAUTION
●
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
GLASS
●
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature.
●
●
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
Appearance and care 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
●
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
CAUTION
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
lar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions before using the air fresheners.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
FLOOR MATS
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter what
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-
come excessively worn.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-
tion of the air bag system and result in
serious personal injury.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
●
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
7-4 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
●
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
●
Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
LAI0009
Floor mat positioning aid
Moisture
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
hicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side
floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in
them. Position the mat by placing the floor mat
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole
while centering the mat in the footwell.
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
Appearance and care 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature
CAUTION
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
●
●
●
●
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
7-6 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Clutch fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-
vice intervals to save you both time and money.
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-
sions and engine performance.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ”is found later in this section.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Outside the vehicle
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Automatic transmission P (Park) position
mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your
vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in
the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
●
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints and
headrests move up and down smoothly and the
locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
tion.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid lev-
els* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the
reservoir.
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Under the hood and vehicle
Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
diately.
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before working
near the fan.
CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift selector to
P (Park).
● If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
● Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component har-
nesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ40DE engine
1. Window washer fluid reservoir
2. Fuse/fusible link box
3. Fuse and relay box
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model)
7. Air cleaner
8. Drive belt location
9. Radiator cap
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11. Battery
12. Engine coolant reservoir
LII0167
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
CAUTION
with
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze
and 50% demineralized or distilled water.
The use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than a Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent may
damage the engine cooling system.
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-
freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze
solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Additional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.
WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
Outside temperature
down to
Genuine
NISSAN
Long Life
Antifreeze/
Coolant or
equivalent
Demineral-
ized or dis-
tilled water
LDI0436
°C
°F
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
-35
-30
50%
50%
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.
gine damage, use only
NISSAN radiator cap.
a
genuine
The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-
ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten
it until a clicking sound is heard.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
LDI0437
LDI0371
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
level. It should be between the H (High) and
. This is the normal oper-
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
the L (Low) mark , remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
B
L (Low) marks
᭺
● Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
A
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
᭺
C
opening. Do not overfill
.
᭺
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
5. Remove the drain plug
with a wrench by
᭺
CAUTION
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” in this section.
●
●
Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly.
Check your local regulations.
WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
WDI0500
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
A
3. Remove the oil filler cap
counterclockwise.
by turning it
᭺
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B
.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information”section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
WDI0502
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
9. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired.
2. Turn the engine off.
10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.
4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter ex-
posing the filter.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
A
5. Loosen the oil filter
with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
᭺
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.
CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
● Recommended fluid
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
CAUTION
is
Genuine
● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not
available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
may also be used.
● Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-
tion in driveability and automatic trans-
mission durability, and may damage the
automatic transmission, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
WDI0282
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also
described on caution labels located in the engine
compartment.
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-
ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove
the cap and fill through the opening.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and clutch
(if so equipped) systems. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
system and affect the vehicle’s stop-
ping ability.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
LDI0463
LDI0463
● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of reach of children.
BRAKE FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID (if so equipped)
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir
(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is
below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid
up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-
quently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
BATTERY
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
●
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
●
●
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-
plosive. Explosive gases can cause
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touch-
ing a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer reser-
voir tank with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer reservoir tank.
LDI0441
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer reservoir
tank. Do not use the windshield-washer
reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the win-
dow washer fluid into the tank opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
● When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
WDI0224
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
WDI0529
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall
the vent caps.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
A
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
The current sensor
is located near the battery
᭺
along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
LDI0454
CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
● Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE BELT
SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
WDI0639
SDI1895
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Automatic belt tensioner
3. Cooling fan
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
4. Air conditioner compressor
5. Crankshaft pulley
6. Generator
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped
᭺
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
ping.
●
Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR CLEANER
NOTE:
WARNING
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
WARNING
CAUTION
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
WDI0712
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide.”
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1
Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner
cover upward.
᭺
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so
equipped)
2. Remove the air cleaner filter.
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-
ing and the cover with a damp cloth.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the filter, perform the following proce-
dure:
LDI0442
LDI0387
1. Open the glove box and press in on the
sides so that it will open completely allowing
it to hang by the cord.
2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the
filter cover.
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, replace the blades.
LDI0404
WDI0408
NOTE:
REPLACING
CAUTION
The filters are marked with air flow arrows.
The end of the filter with the arrow should
face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows
should face downward.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2
Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
᭺
3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide
it over to the right. Insert the second filter
into the housing.
3
Remove the wiper blade.
᭺
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
4. Replace the filter cover.
5. Install the glove box door.
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Return the wiper to its original position and
release it until it has made contact with the
windshield.
CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
WDI0595
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle
A
. This may cause clogging or improper wind-
᭺
shield washer operation. If wax gets into the
nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin
B
.
᭺
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0292
Rear window wiper blade
1
Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-
dow.
᭺
2
Push the wiper blade in and pivot until the
blade becomes free.
᭺
3
Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and
snap into place.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKES
FUSES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
LDI0455
A
Two types of fuses are used. Type
is used in
Brake pad wear indicators
᭺
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
B
is used in the passenger compartment fuse
᭺
box.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
LDI0457
LDI0444
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0452
WDI0452
LDI0445
Type A
A
A
5. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
᭺
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
B
.
4. If the fuse is open
, replace it with an
.
fuse
᭺
᭺
B
equivalent good fuse
᭺
CAUTION
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
LDI0456
Type B
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as it could cause a malfunction.
When changing the battery, do not let dust
or oil get on the keyfob.
There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-
tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the same or equivalent type.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
4
Close the lid securely.
᭺
5. Press the
button, then the
button two or three times to check the key-
fob operation.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
●
●
●
An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
The keyfob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
LDI0484
3
C
Install a new battery
down.
with the “+” facing
᭺
᭺
KEYFOB (if so equipped)
The operational range of the keyfob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
●
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the
battery across the contact points will seri-
ously deplete the storage capacity.
1
A
Open the lid using a coin
.
᭺
᭺
2
B
Remove the battery
.
᭺
᭺
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTS
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice:
HEADLIGHTS
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A
bulb can be replaced from inside the engine
compartment without removing the headlight as-
sembly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
CAUTION
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
HANDS.
● Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-
light reflector for a long period of time
as dust, moisture and smoke may enter
the headlight body and affect the per-
formance of the headlight.
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-
wise until it is free from the headlight reflec-
A
tor and then remove it
.
᭺
5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do not
shake or rotate the bulb when removing it
B
.
᭺
Replacing the headlight bulb
1. Insert the bulb.
DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
HANDS.
2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.
● Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-
tacts the headlight body.
3. Push the electrical connector into the bulb
plastic base until it snaps and stops.
4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.
5. Close the hood.
WDI0294
Removing the headlight bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
rear end of the bulb.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.*1
Headlight
65/55
29/8
3.8
9007 (HB5)
3457AK
194
Turn signal light/Parking light
Side marker
Off road lights*2
Rear combination light
Turn signal
—
—
27
—
18
5
3156AK
T20
Stop/Tail
Back-up
921
License plate light
Fog light (if so equipped)*2
Interior light
168
55
8
H11
AL48
AL48
AL48
—
Map lights
8
Cargo light
High-mounted stop light*2
8
—
*1Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
*2The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Map lights
2. Off road lights (if so equipped)
3. Interior light
4. Fog light (if so equipped)
5. Headlight assembly
6. Cargo light
7. High-mount stoplight
8. Rear combination light
9. License plate light
WDI0295
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or
cover.
: Indicates bulb removal
: Indicates bulb installation
WDI0671
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LDI0478
WDI0206
Map lights
to protect the housing.
Interior light/Cargo light
1
to protect the housing.
1
Use a cloth
Use a cloth
᭺
᭺
LDI0448
Rear combination light
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
TIRE PRESSURE
WARNING
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
pacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped). Do not load your ve-
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-
loading your vehicle may result in
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
ing conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable han-
dling characteristics and could
also lead to a serious accident.
Loading beyond the specified ca-
pacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
WDI0730
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire and loading information label
᭺
1
᭺
Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
2
᭺
Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-
mation in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section.
3
᭺
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
5
᭺
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
᭺
Spare tire size or compact spare tire
size (if so equipped).
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire Placard (if so
equipped) or the Tire and Loading
Information label (if so equipped).
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
LDI0393
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Size
Cold Tire Infla-
tion Pressure
Front Original Tire:
P265/65R17 110T
P265/70R16 111T
P265/75R16 114T
240 kPa, 35 PSI
240 kPa, 35 PSI
240 kPa, 35 PSI
Rear Original Tire:
P265/65R17 110T
P265/70R16 111T
P265/75R16 114T
Spare Tire:
WDI0394
P265/65R17 110T
P265/70R16 111T
P265/75R16 114T
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
1
᭺
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
᭺
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
4
sure
Maximum permissible inflation pres-
᭺
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
WDI0396
Example
5
᭺
Maximum load rating
2
᭺
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
ture.
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
6
᭺
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
᭺
The word “radial”
TYPES OF TIRES
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
8
᭺
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
All season tires
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners
when recommended by the tire chain manufac-
turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the
tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-
ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-
tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your
vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear
paved roads.
WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section in this manual for tire re-
placing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
WDI0259
● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
Tire wear and damage
● Do not include the spare tire in
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
WARNING
the tire rotation.
● Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing wheels and tires
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics, affect
the VDC system and/or interference
with the brake discs/drums. Such inter-
ference can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe
wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail with-
out warning.
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
● The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain
clearance, speedometer calibration,
headlight aim and bumper height.
Some of these effects may lead to acci-
dents and could result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Four-wheel drive models
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may dam-
age the transmission, transfer case and
differential gears.
● If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should
also be checked and corrected as necessary.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
●
●
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
●
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Care of wheels
●
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
●
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
●
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Channel tie-down hooks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . .9-16
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . .9-30
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-32
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure
21-1/8 gal
Imp measure
17-5/8 gal
Liter
80
Fuel
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1
Engine oil *8
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change
Without oil filter change
Cooling system
With reservoir
5-3/8 qt
5-1/8 qt
4-1/2 qt
4-1/4 qt
5.1
4.8
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30
2-3/4 gal
2-1/4 gal
10.2
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
Manual transmission gear oil
2WD
4WD
4-1/4 qt
4-3/8 qt
3-1/2 qt
3-5/8 qt
4.0
4.2
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE
75W-85
Automatic transmission fluid
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
Multi-purpose grease
Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-
tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *3
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
Transfer fluid
Front final drive oil
Rear final drive oil
—
—
—
—
1-3/4 qt
1-1/2 pt
2-7/8 pt
3-1/2 pt
1 gal
—
—
2.0
0.85
1.6
2.0
4.5
HFC-134a (R-134a)*6
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent*6
Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended *7
2-1/8 qt
1-3/4 pt
3-3/8 pt
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity 80W-90, *9,
Genuine NISSAN differential oil synthetic 75W-90 or API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE
With A/T
With M/T
4-1/4 pt
75W-90 *10
Windshield-washer fluid (shared between front and
rear wipers)
1-1/4 gal
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”
*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”
*3: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterio-
ration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*4: DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.
*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”
*7: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the NISSAN
new vehicle limited warranty.
*8: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”
*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).
*10: See your NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Reformulated gasoline
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
● Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
a
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
●
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
E–85 fuel
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Aftermarket fuel additives
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
CAUTION
Octane rating tips
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
WTI0183
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives
engine life and performance. See “Capacities
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
●
repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
●
●
●
●
driving in dusty conditions
extensive idling
towing a trailer
stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
VQ40DE
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
in (mm) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)
cu in (cm3) 241.30 (3,954)
1–2–3–4–5–6
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
Idle speed
See the “Emission Control Information label” on the under-
A/T (in “N” position)
side of the hood.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
DILFR5A–11
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation
Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height (4wd model)
Front Track
Rear Track
Wheelbase
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
178.7 (4,539)
72.8 (1,849)
74.9 (1,902)
61.8 (1,570)
61.8 (1,570)
106.3 (2,700)
Wheels
16 x 7.0J
17 x 7.5J
Tires
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
lb (kg)
See the “F.M.V.S.S.certification
label” on the center pillar be-
tween the driver’s side front
and side doors.
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/65R17
Full size
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
Spare tire
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
LTI0085
LTI0086
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LTI0127
WTI0099
WTI0173
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WTI0100
WTI0167
LTI0137
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
Use the following step to mount the front license
plate:
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.
●
Attach the license plate bracket on the plas-
tic finisher at the location mark (small
dimple) using the two 6 mm screws pro-
vided.
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped).
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing)
-
maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
TERMS
tion
is
located
on
the
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
LTI0152
Example
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
LTI0140
LTI0141
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of Weights” later in
this section.
Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooks
Adjustable cargo area floor tie-down
hooks
SECURING THE LOAD
WARNING
There are tie down hooks located in both the
ceiling and floor of the cargo area as shown. The
tie down hooks can be used to secure cargo with
ropes or other types of straps. See “Channel tie
down hooks” in this section.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
Do not apply a total load of more than 110
lbs. (490 N) to a single metal ceiling tie-
down hook when securing cargo.
Do not apply a total load of more than 110
lbs. (490 N) to a single plastic floor tie-
down hook when securing cargo.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
The adjustable channel tie-down hook system
allows you to move tie-down hooks in the cargo
area to the best location to secure a load.
● Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage could
occur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result in
loss of control and cause personal
injury.
The tie-down hooks must be installed so the hook
is properly fixed to the channel. If the tie-down
hook is not fixed to the channel it cannot be
properly tightened.
Check the tightness of the tie-down hooks peri-
odically during a trip to make sure they have not
become loose.
LTI0144
A
1. Assemble 4 hook loops
to 4 hook plates
᭺
CHANNEL TIE-DOWN HOOKS (if so
equipped)
B
by screwing the hook plate onto the hook
᭺
(5 revolutions).
Install the tie-down hooks as follows:
WARNING
● Properly install and tighten the tie-
down hooks into the channel system.
Also, do not install any rope or straps
directly to the channel. Failure to prop-
erly install the tie-down hooks or in-
stalling ropes or straps directly to the
channel can cause the cargo to become
unsecured. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LTI0145
LTI0146
LTI0147
A
B
Correct,
Incorrect
᭺
᭺
2. Insert (at any position) 2 channel tie-down
3. Hand tighten each hook until it is securely
fixed to the channel.
A
B
hooks
into the channel opening
of
᭺
᭺
each channel and slide to the desired posi-
tion.
4. To reposition the channel tie-down hook un-
screw the hook loop from the hook plate (2
revolutions), move to a new location, and
retighten.
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOADING TIPS
● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
covered
by
the
vehicle’s
warranty.
WARNING
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
LTI0148
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
A
B
Correct,
Incorrect
᭺
᭺
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could oc-
cur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING A TRAILER
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
CAUTION
●
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified
in the following “Towing Load/Specification”
chart.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
LTI0162
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater
than these or using improper towing equipment
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-
ing and other systems.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-
priate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-
pability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automati-
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a col-
lision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. See “If your
vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
WTI0160
ATI1025
Tongue load
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight
When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-
uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - (GAW)
15 percent of the total trailer load or use the
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu-
facturer. The tongue load must be within the
maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-
ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper tongue load.
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
“Towing Load/Specification” chart found
later in this section.
●
●
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification” chart -
9,658 lb. (4380 kg).
Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-
ing Load/Specification” chart - 5,000 lb.
(2268 kg).
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum towing capacity.
5,400 lb. (2449 kg)
GVWR
GVW
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
– 4,900 lb. (2222 kg)
= 500 lb. (226 kg)
Available for tongue
weight
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
9,658 lb. (4380 kg)
GCWR
GVW
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-
ings.
– 4,900 lb. (2222 kg)
= 4,758 lb. (2158 kg) Capacity available for
towing
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
500 lb. (226 kg) Available tongue weight
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
/ 4,758 lb. (1994 kg)
=
Available capacity
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
Example:
10 % tongue weight
●
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 4,900 lb. (2222 kg).
The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
●
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
5,400 lb. (2449 kg).
To determine the available towing capacity, use
the following procedure.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
trailer tongue load specification recommended
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
of the trailer by the height of the trailer. For
example, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tall
has a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet.
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional
trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-
cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This
hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of
this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball
that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine
NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available
from your NISSAN dealer.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
US & CAN
2WD
4WD
Maximum Tow-
ing Capacity*1,
*2
5,000 lb.
(2,268 kg)
5,000 lb.
(2,268 kg)
Maximum
Tongue Load
500 lb.
500 lb.
(227 kg)
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
(227 kg)
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of
your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your
vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer
hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make
sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property
damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
Maximum
Gross Com- 9,656 lb.
9,656 lb.
Trailer frontal area
bined Weight
Rating
(4,379 kg)
(4,379 kg)
CAUTION
Maximum trailer
frontal area
Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal
area specification may exceed the towing
capacity of the vehicle. This may affect the
towing performance and lead to vehicle
damage.
60 sq ft (5.52 sq meters)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated
assuming a base vehicle with driver and any
options required to achieve the rating. Additional
passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment
will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of a
trailer. The frontal area is the total area of the
vehicle and trailer that is affected by air resis-
tance while towing. Do not exceed the maximum
trailer frontal area specification shown in the
ЉTowing Load/Specification” chart. The frontal
area can be determined by multiplying the width
*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is
recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
Ball mount
WARNING
A weight-distributing hitch system may af-
fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
you are considering use of
distributing hitch system with
a
weight-
surge
a
brake-equipped trailer, check with the
surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer
to determine if and how this can be done.
Weight carrying hitches
Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-
turer for installing and using the weight-
distributing hitch system.
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is
one that is designed to carry the whole amount of
tongue weight and gross weight directly on the
ball mount and on the receiver.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.
With the ignition on and the doors closed,
allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes
so that it can level.
●
The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or
“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball
mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue
weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles
can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer,
and need some of the tongue weight transferred
through the frame and pushing down on the front
wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.
●
●
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on
the front and rear bumpers at the center of
the vehicle.
The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust
the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper
height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of
the reference height measured in step 2. The
rear bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is
recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a
maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. Check with the
trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to
determine if they recommend the use of a weight-
distributing hitch system.
●
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Class II hitch
● To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
WARNING
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If the
rear bumper is higher than the measured
reference height when loaded, the vehicle
may handle unpredictably which could
cause a loss of vehicle control and cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
● After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
CAUTION
Tire pressures
Sway control device
● Special hitches which include frame re-
inforcements are required for towing
above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-
ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and
hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport
utility vehicles are available at
NISSAN dealer.
● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-
hicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
a
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.
● The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impact-
absorbing bumper.
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-
tem, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the
optional trailer tow package are equipped with a
7-pin trailer harness connector. A NISSAN 7–pin
tow harness kit is available from your dealer. If
your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connec-
tor, an adapter will be needed to connect the
trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are available
at auto parts stores and hitch retailers.
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-
tems are activated by an electronic signal sent
from a trailer brake controller (special brake-
sensing module). If electric trailer brakes are
used, see ЉElectric trailer brake controllerЉ in this
section.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
Have a professional supplier of towing equip-
ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly
installed and demonstrate proper brake function
testing.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
Trailer brakes
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available power-
type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-
tain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
WARNING
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used. However, most states
require a separate braking system on trailers with
a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make
sure the trailer meets the local regulations and
the regulations where you plan to tow.
Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system.
Electric trailer brake controller
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-
quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer
brake controller.
Several types of braking systems are available.
A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is available
that is specifically designed to be used when
installing an aftermarket brake controller.
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line
running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are
activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch
ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic
surge brakes are common on rental trailers and
some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is
no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-
eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.
Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake con-
troller according to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pre-towing tips
Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
●
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
●
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-
sorb the vehicle load.
●
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-
ently becoming unlatched.
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the
trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
4. Apply the parking brake.
●
●
●
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Make sure the
indicator light (if so
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
equipped) indicates the transfer case is in
4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If
●
When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
the
indicator light is flashing, or the
ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission
is in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switch
to 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmission
park warning light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section and “Using four wheel
drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving”
section.
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
7. Turn off the engine.
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To drive away:
●
●
●
Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
1. Start the vehicle.
For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-
anced as described earlier in this section.
Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
●
Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-
siderably more distance than normal pass-
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
●
●
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
●
●
Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-
mission to a lower gear for engine braking
when driving down steep or long hills. This
will help slow the vehicle without applying
the brakes.
●
While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-
crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-
tain adequate control, reduce your speed
and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or
repeated use of the brakes when descend-
ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness
and could cause overheating. Shifting to a
lower gear instead provides “engine brak-
ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-
quently.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-
hicle handling.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
●
●
Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the ve-
hicle
●
●
If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.
NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-
trol not be used while towing a trailer.
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
CAUTION
●
Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
●
On four-wheel drive vehicles, place the
transfer case in the 2H range. Failure to do
so will cause the powertrain to bind up.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-
sion vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrication.
●
After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing
may cause damage to internal transmission
parts.
When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-
quently. For additional information, see the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.
Automatic Transmission (if so
equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic
transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their product.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
9-28 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
WARNING
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Temperature A, B and C
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Technical and consumer information 9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN.
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
●
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
I/M
test,
check
the
vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-
tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is
“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20
seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the
MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-
dition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If
you cannot or do not want to perform the driving
pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
●
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
9-30 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
9. Turn the engine off.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
WARNING
10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic con-
ditions and obey all traffic laws.
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-
able between steps. Do not stop the engine until
step 7 is completed.
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant
temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-
low the engine to idle until the gauge needle
points between the C and H (normal oper-
ating temperature).
●
●
●
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
●
●
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Sounds are not recorded.
4. Stop the vehicle.
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-
utes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector in
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
Technical and consumer information 9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-
tive will assist you.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
9-32 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws
that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-
ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-
tect you, so you can take action to protect your-
self.
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-
tection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Technical and consumer information 9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
9-34 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Index
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
FM-AM radio with compact disc
(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
FM/AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-36
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-13
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
A
Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . .5-32
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Air bag system
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-46
Automatic transmission position indicator
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-13
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-59, 2-17
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Air conditioner
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-30, 4-33
CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-27
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-31
Child restraints. . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-27, 1-29
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . .1-27, 1-33, 1-38, 1-41
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-31
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Clutch
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . .4-5, 4-13
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
B
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Bluetoothா hands-free phone system . . . . .4-38
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Brake
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Heater and air conditioner controls .4-2, 4-10
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-14
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-21
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-13
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-31
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-30, 4-33
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-27
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-31
Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-29
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-21, 8-22
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . . . .2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-36
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-2, 4-10
Coolant
E
F
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-30
Engine
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-29
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Fluid
Capacities and recommended
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-56
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Front air bag system
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-7
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-14
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2
D
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-52
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-27
Defroster switch
Capacities and recommended
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-28
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Door open warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Driving
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-16
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emission control information label . . . . .9-10
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-58
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
License plate
G
I
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Gauge
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11
Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Indicator lights and audible reminders
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Voltmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . . . . .3-13
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-28
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . . . .9-11
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-59, 2-17
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-29
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-13
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-26
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
H
J
Hands-free phone system, Bluetoothா . . . . .4-38
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-26
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Heater
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
K
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Off road lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-53
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Warning/indicator lights and audible
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-2, 4-10
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-11
Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Hook
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Keyless entry system
(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-5
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Lights
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Lock
L
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-17
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12
Luggage storage
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
N
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11
O
(see vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . .2-39
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Off road lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Oil
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-27, 1-33, 1-38, 1-41
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14
Precautions on supplemental restraint
M
Capacities and recommended
Maintenance
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Overheat
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Manual front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-28
Mirror
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-57
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
R
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Owner’s manual/service manual order
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-30, 4-33
FM-AM radio with compact disc
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-13
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Multi-remote control system
(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
FM/AM radio with compact disc
P
(CD) player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-36
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Parking
(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-5
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Phone, Bluetoothா hands-free system . . . . .4-38
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
Seats
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-59, 2-17
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-52
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-58
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44
Supplemental restraint system
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-25
Recorders
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9
Remote keyless entry system. . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-30
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Manual front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . .1-2
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Shifting
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-23
Side air bag system (See supplemental side air
bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-56
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58
Starting
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Steering
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-36
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-44
Switch
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-46
Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . . .2-33
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-26
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-31
Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Child seat belts . . . . .1-27, 1-33, 1-38, 1-41
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-30
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Seat belt
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-57
Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-23
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature gauge
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-14
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Door open warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-14
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-29
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-53
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-58
Warning/indicator lights and audible
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-29
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-31
Towing
2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Transmission
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-16
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-30
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-32
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13, 6-14
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-
lizer system), engine start. . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Voltmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle
in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-46
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-24
Wiper
W
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-16
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Warning
Rear window wiper and washer switches . .2-25
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-59, 2-17
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-13
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
●
Engine oil with API Certification Mark
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
●
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
a
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical
and consumer information” section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing : February 2010 (10)
Publication No.: OM0E 0N50U1
N50-D
Printed in U.S.A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
